2006 tl online reference owner's manual...

295
2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................7 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................57 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................119 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................175 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving .......................................................................................................................................................... 187 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................207 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected ...............................................................................................................243 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................267 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................279 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................283 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump. Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................4

Upload: buiminh

Post on 06-Feb-2018

221 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................7 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................57 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................119 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................175 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving .......................................................................................................................................................... 187The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................207The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................243 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................267ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................279A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................283How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................4

Page 2: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This owner’s manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This owner’s manual covers all models ofthe 2006 Acura TL. You may finddescriptions of equipment and features thatare not on your particular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SEPC20.

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Page 3: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to thestate of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as ‘‘event data recorders’’or ‘‘sensing and diagnostic modules.’’

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Acura TL was a wise investment. Itwill give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

Page 4: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

--

--

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Page 5: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

* On models without Navigation System:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

POWER DOORLOCKS

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AIRBAGS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

(P.11, 25)

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

MIRROR CONTROLS

CLOCK

(P.101)

(P.103)

(P.92)

(P.107)

(P.93)(P.177) (P.178)

(P. 193)

(P. 190)

(P.127)

(P.120)

(P.112)

Page 6: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

* To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

CRUISECONTROLBUTTONS

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLBUTTONS

HORN

HANDSFREELINKBUTTONS

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH

(P.84, 85)

(P.85)

(P.203)

(P.101) (P.88) (P.150) (P.160)(P.106)

(P.153)

(P.87)

(P.86)

(P.83)

TM

Page 7: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

6

Page 8: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 155. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 166. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 21...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 22

Additional Information About...........................Your Airbags . 23

......Airbag System Components . 23How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 25...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 30

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 30How The Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31.............................Airbag Service . 32

...Additional Safety Precautions . 33Protecting Children General

................................Guidelines . 34All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 34All Children Should Sit in a

.................................Back Seat . 35

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 37

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 37

...Additional Safety Precautions . 38Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 39.......................Protecting Infants . 39

.........Protecting Small Children . 40.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 42....................Installing a Child Seat . 43

...............................With LATCH . 44.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46

..............................With a Tether . 47..............Using an Outer Anchor . 48

...........Protecting Larger Children . 49...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 49

..................Using a Booster Seat . 50When Can a Lager Child Sit in

.........................................Front . 51...Additional Safety Precautions . 52

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53...................................Safety Labels . 54

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

Page 9: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until theycan use the belt properly without abooster (see pages ).

16

49 52

209

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

8

Page 10: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety FeaturesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

9

(1)(4)(3)

(7)

(2)(6)

(5)

(2)

(8) (10) (9)

(9)

(8)(11)

(7)

(1) Safety Cage

(2) Crush Zones

(3) Seats and Seat-Backs

(4) Head Restraints

(5) Collapsible Steering Column

(6) Seat Belts

(7) Front Airbags

(8) Side Airbags

(9) Side Curtain Airbags

(10) Door Locks

(11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Page 11: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers. Seat belts are the single most

effective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side and rear impacts, androllovers.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wearyour seat belts

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 12: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).25

28

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

What You Should Do:

Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

Page 13: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page formore information on how your sidecurtain airbags work).

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

30

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose hazards.

12

Page 14: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengersand teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front seat.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

If any door or the trunk is not closedtightly, the multi-information displayreminds you to close the opendoor(s) or the trunk before you startdriving (see page ).

See page for how to lock thedoors.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have your front passenger adjusttheir seat as far to the rear aspossible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

34 3869

92

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the DoorsIntroduction 2.1.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Page 15: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering in and out and up and down(see page ).

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

88

98

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Page 16: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablerestraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. A taller personshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

98

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Page 17: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

99

Protecting Adults and Teens

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

16

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Page 18: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using aseat belt that is not working properlycan be seriously injured or killed.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebutton and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

20

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

RELEASEBUTTON

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 19: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

Advice for Pregnant WomenMaintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.

Protecting Adults and Teens

18

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 20: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.Two people should never use the

same seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety Precautions

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

Page 21: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.If you continue driving without

fastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals, and youwill also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position without fasteningyour belt, a beeper will sound andthe indicator will flash. If you do notfasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator will stopflashing but remain on.

16

46

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

20

Page 22: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causefront airbag inflation.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

If the front seat belt tensioners everactivate, they must be replaced asthe belts will no longer retractproperly.

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

Page 23: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

We provide a lifetime warranty onseat belts for U.S. models. See your

bookletfor details.

231

231

Acura Warranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularly,and have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 24: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

25

28

30

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

(1) (2)

(3)

(4) (5)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)(9)

(6) (7)

(8)

(10)

(5)

(4)

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

Page 25: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. These automatically turn offthe passenger’s front airbag ifthey detect an infant or a smallchild may be in the seat (see page

).Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

21

31

31

31

27

31

30

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

Page 26: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 27

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

Page 27: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

Dual-Threshold Airbags

is latched

less severe

not latched

26

Page 28: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS Indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although we do notencourage carrying an infant orsmall child in the front passenger’sseat, if the sensors detect the weightof an infant or small child, thesystem will automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

Page 29: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat. If you ever have a moderate to

severe side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

31

232

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

28

Page 30: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If the Side Airbag Off indicatorcomes on (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger’sseat.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if the heightand position sensors in the seatdetect a child has leaned into theside airbag’s deployment path, theairbag will shut off.

31

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Side Airbag Cutoff System

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

Page 31: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

30

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Page 32: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

This indicatoralerts you that the

passenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and go out. Ifit doesn’t come on, stays on, orcomes on while driving without apassenger in the front seat, have thesystem checked.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has shut offbecause weight sensors detect theweight of an infant or small child onthe front passenger’s seat. It doesnot mean there is a problem with theairbag.

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

CanadaU. S.

CanadaU. S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

Page 33: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

If the indicator comes on with nopassenger in the front, or with anadult in the seat, there may be aproblem with the advanced airbagsystem. Have the vehicle checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag Service

An airbag ever inflates.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

32

Page 34: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person with

disabilities, first contact AcuraClient Services at 800-382-2238.

If water or another liquidsoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag cutoffsystem from working properly.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

Additional Safety Precautions

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

Page 35: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

--

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

39 4149 52

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

34

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

Page 36: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.

Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

Children who ride in the back areless likely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system, whichcan automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), please follow theguidelines below.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

49

27

CONTINUED

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small Children

Larger Children

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

35

Page 37: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Canadian Models

U.S. Models

Protecting Children General Guidelines

36

Page 38: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

49

18

16

98

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Protecting Children General GuidelinesD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

37

Page 39: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

94

94

Additional Safety Precautions

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

38

Page 40: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

In this vehicle, a rear-facing childseat can be placed in any seatingposition in the back seat, but not inthe front.

.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front seat

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

39

Page 41: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

A child who is at least 1 year old, andwho fits within the child seat maker’sweight and height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger’s seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limitfor the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

27

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

40

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 42: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Protecting Infants and Small ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

41

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Page 43: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerrear seats.

44

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

42

Page 44: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

Page 45: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated with a small button abovethe anchor point.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

44

MARKS

Ripid typeLOWER ANCHORS

Page 46: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connector as shownabove.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, then tighten the strap asinstructed by the child seat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

4.

5.

6.

7.

99

Installing a Child SeatD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

45

Flexible type

TETHER STRAPHOOK

ANCHOR

Page 47: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

46

Page 48: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

COVER

ANCHORAGE POINT

Page 49: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the legs of the headrestraint.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the top of theseat-back.

Follow steps 2 and 3 in theprevious column.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

46 46

Installing a Child Seat

Using an Outer Anchor Using the Center Anchor

48

TETHER STRAPHOOK

COVER

ANCHOR

Page 50: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Page 51: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

3.

4.

5.

35

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

50

Page 52: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a boosterseat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout the ride.

49

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

Physical Size

Maturity

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

Page 53: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

Protecting Larger Children

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

52

Page 54: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the trunk lid open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows,and set the climate control system asshown below.

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide HazardD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 55: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your dealer for areplacement.

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

54

HOOD

DASHBOARDRADIATOR CAP

Page 56: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

55

SUN VISORDOORJAMB

Page 57: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

56

Page 58: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 58............................Instrument Panel . 59

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60.............................................Gauges . 66

...................Temperature Gauge . 66..................................Fuel Gauge . 66

.............Multi-Information Display . 67......Controls Near Steering Wheel . 82

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 83...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 84

........................................Fog Lights . 85........Instrument Panel Brightness . 85

..................Automatic Lighting Off . 86.................Hazard Warning Button . 86.................Rear Window Defogger . 87

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 88..................................................Keys . 89

................................Ignition Switch . 90........................Immobilizer System . 91

......................................Door Locks . 92................................................Trunk . 93

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 94..................Childproof Door Locks . 94

.......................Remote Transmitter . 95.................................................Seats . 98

..........Trunk Pass-through Cover . 100

...........................................Mirrors . 101Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 103..................................Seat Heaters . 106

............................Power Windows . 107.......................................Moonroof . 110

..............................................Clock . 112...............................Parking Brake . 112...............................Interior Lights . 113

.........Interior Convenience Items . 114.....................Beverage Holders . 115

........Accessory Power Sockets . 115..................................Glove Box . 116

.............Console Compartment . 116..................Front Door Pockets . 117

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

57

Page 59: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

* On models without Navigation System:

Control Locations

58

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY

POWER DOOR LOCKS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

CLOCK

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(P.103)

(P.92)

(P.107)

(P.93)

(P.101)(P.112)

(P.177) (P.178)

(P.193)

(P.190)

(P.127)

(P.120)

Page 60: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.:

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

VEHICLESTABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEMINDICATOR

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

(P.62) (P.60)

(P.61)

(P.63)

(P.62) (P.62)

(P.63)

(P.60)

(P.61)

(P.64)

(P.64)

(P.64)

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

(P.65)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT INDICATOR (P.63)

LOW TIRE PRESSUREINDICATOR(P.65)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

(P.60, 256)

(P.60, 256) (P.62, 202) (P.61, 201)

(P.60, 257)

(P.67)

Page 61: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. The engine can be severely damaged

if this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

This indicator has two functions:

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals, and youwill also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a chime will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belt, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belt before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. Driving withthe parking brake not fullyreleased can damage the brakesand tires.

1.

2.

69

256

256

257

258

70

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

60

CanadaU.S.

Page 62: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theABS. If this happens, take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it checked.With this indicator on, your vehiclestill has normal braking ability but noanti-lock. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Ifit comes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags or automatic seatbelt tensioners. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,driver’s seat position sensor, frontpassenger’s weight sensors, or sidecurtain airbags. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

30

31

201

Instrument Panel Indicators

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator Side Airbag Off

Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

61

U. S. Canada

Page 63: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator has three functions.

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. See page for moreinformation on the VSA system.

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the master button (see page

).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

1.

2.

3.

202

202202

153

153

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

62

Page 64: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsblink. All turn signals on the outsideof the vehicle should flash.

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. See page

for information on the headlightcontrols.

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin a circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.228

84

84

Canadian models only

Instrument Panel Indicators

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

Page 65: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK(0) position.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. See page

for information on fog lightoperation.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It thengoes off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink and the enginewill not start (see page ).

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. When the indicatorcomes on, there is about 1.2 U.S. gal(4.5 ) of fuel remaining in the tankbefore the needle reaches E. Thereis a small reserve of fuel remainingin the tank when the needle doesreach E.

91

85

U.S. models onlyImmobilizer SystemIndicator

Low Fuel Indicator Fog Light Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

64

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

Page 66: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it means that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure. You will also see a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. The multi-informationdisplay will show you which tire haslost the pressure and how muchpressure it has lost (see page ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. You willalso see ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. With this indicator on, thelow tire pressure indicator will notcome on, and the tire pressuremonitor on the multi-informationdisplay will not be displayed.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure on the multi-information display, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page ), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service.For more information, see page .

245

204

204

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

65

Page 67: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Turn topage for instructions andprecautions on checking the engine’scooling system.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. Drivinguphill or making turns can cause theneedle to fluctuate or the low fuelindicator to come on early. Theneedle returns to the bottom afteryou turn off the ignition.

254

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

GaugesInstrum

entsand

Controls

66

FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATURE GAUGESPEEDOMETERTACHOMETER

Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could causethe engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter.

Page 68: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

Driver 1 or 2 DetectedDoor and Trunk OpenFasten Seat BeltRelease Parking Brake

OdometerTrip MeterOutside TemperatureEngine Oil Life

Maintenance Messages Auto door lock conditionsAuto door unlock conditionsWhenever unlocking (driver’sdoor, or all doors)Keyless lock acknowledgmentconditionsSecurity relock timerHeadlight auto off timerInterior light dimming time

To customize these control settings,see page .

Low Windshield Washer FluidLevel (Canada only)

Here is a list of the messages youcan see. The following pages giveyou more information on thesemessages.

Tighten Fuel Cap With the multi-information displayand the two buttons next to it, youcan also customize these vehiclecontrol settings to your liking.

Language Selection (Canada only)HandsFree LinkKeyless Memory SettingsTrip ComputerTire Pressure

76

Multi-Information Display

67

SELECT/RESETBUTTON

INFOBUTTON

TM

TM

Page 69: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

><

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the basic displaychanges, as shown in the illustration,each time you press the side ofthe INFO button. If you press theside of the INFO button, the displayreturns to the previous message.

On Canadian models, the language inthe multi information display can beset to English or French. To changethe language see page .81

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

68

(CANADIAN MODELS ONLY)

Page 70: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the key, thedisplay shows ‘‘DRIVER 1DETECTED’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2DETECTED’’, depending on whichremote transmitter was used last.(The driver’s ‘‘ID’’ is determined bythe transmitter.)

If you use the remote transmitter tounlock the driver’s door, the displayshows ‘‘DRIVER 1 DETECTED’’ or‘‘DRIVER 2 DETECTED’’ dependingon which transmitter you use, andthe driver’s seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored in thattransmitter (see page ).

If the trunk or any door is not closedtightly, the display reminds you toclose the open trunk or the door(s)before you start driving.

In addition to the seat belt reminderin the instrument panel, the multi-information display interrupts thecurrent display and shows ‘‘FASTENSEAT BELT’’ for about 6 seconds ifyou do not fasten your seat beltwhile driving. This message repeatsif you ignore it and do not wear yourseat belt while the vehicle is moving.

103

Driver 1 or 2 Detected

Door and Trunk Open

Fasten Seat Belt

Multi-Information Display

69

Page 71: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you start driving without releasingthe parking brake, the multi-information display interrupts thecurrent display and shows‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE.’’This message continues, and achime sounds, until you release theparking brake, or the vehicle speedslows down to less than 0.5 mph (0.8km/h).

If the fuel fill cap is missing or nottightened properly, you will see‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’. Make surethe fuel cap is installed and tightenedproperly at least once.

The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP messageshould go off after tightening thefuel cap, turning the ignition switchoff and on, then driving over 30 mph(48 km/h) for at least 45 seconds.Due to different driving conditions, itmay take a few driving trips to makethe message go off.

If a loose or missing fuel cap was notthe cause of the TIGHTEN FUELCAP message coming on, themessage will turn off and themalfunction indicator lamp will comeon. If this happens, have your vehiclechecked by a dealer as soon aspossible.

Release Parking Brake Tighten Fuel Cap

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

70

Page 72: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This meter show the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. When you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), Trip A is displayed.Switch between Trip A and Trip B bypressing the Select/Reset buttonrepeatedly. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

If the fluid level in the windshieldwasher reservoir gets low, the multi-information display shows the abovemessage.

On Canadian models

Low Windshield Washer FluidLevel

Odometer Trip Meter

Multi-Information Display

71

ODOMETER TRIP METER

Page 73: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

± ±

- - - -- - - -

Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCentigrade temperature in Canadianmodels.

To reset a trip meter, display it, thenpress and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0.’’

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the Select/Resetbutton for 10 seconds. The followingsequence will appear for 1 secondeach: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).When it reaches the desired value,release the Select/Reset button. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your speed is under

19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

Outside Temperature

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

72

SELECT/RESETBUTTON

Page 74: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions.

When the engine oil life reaches 15percent, the display shows‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ and thecode for the maintenance items to beperformed.

Have your dealer do the indicatedmaintenance as soon as you see thismessage, and have them reset thedisplay after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance or do not reset thedisplay, the message changes to‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when theengine oil life becomes 0 percent.

These messages appear on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

When the engine oil life reaches 5percent, the display shows‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ along withthe same maintenance items.

For details on engine oil life andmaintenance messages, refer to page

.

Also refer to page for importantmaintenance safety precautions.

209

208

Engine Oil Life Maintenance Messages

Multi-Information Display

73

Page 75: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

>When you press the side of theINFO button three times after youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, you will see the abovedisplay.

To see the inflation pressure of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown above.

If one or more of your vehicle tiresare low on pressure, you will see a‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message in the display.If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message.

See page through forcomplete information about theTPMS.

204 206

Multi-Information Display

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) Messages

74

Page 76: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

>When the multi-information displayis in the trip computer mode, pressthe Select/Reset button. The displaychanges as shown above.

The messages in this displayindicate:

AVG MPG: Average vehicle speedAVG MPH: Average fuel economyDIST: Distance traveledTIME: Time traveled

To reset the values in the tripcomputer, press the Select/Resetbutton, and hold it for about 1second.

When the display shows the initialtrip computer screen, press theside of the INFO button to display‘‘RANGE’’. This is the estimateddistance you can travel on the fuelremaining in the tank. This distanceis estimated from the fuel economyyou received over the last severalmiles, so it will vary with changes inspeed, traffic, etc.

Multi-Information Display

Trip Computer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

Page 77: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Select the menu item you want(‘‘CHG SETTINGS’’, ‘‘DEFAULTALL’’ or ‘‘EXIT’’) by moving thepointer ‘‘ ’’ with the INFO button.After selecting a menu item, enteryour selection by pressing theSelect/Reset button.

To exit this mode without changingthe current settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’and press the Select/Reset button.The display will move to the nextmode.

If you want to change the settings,select ‘‘CHG SETTINGS’’, and pressthe Select/Reset button. The displaywill change to the screen shown inthe middle column of this page.

While ‘‘Keyless Memory Settings’’ isdisplayed, press the Select/Resetbutton. The display will change tothe screen shown above.

Auto door lock conditionsAuto door unlock conditionsKeyless lock acknowledgmentconditionsSecurity relock timerHeadlight auto off timerInterior light dimming time

With the vehicle stopped and thetransmission in Park (A/T) or theparking brake set (M/T), you cancustomize some of the vehiclecontrol settings to your preference.Here are the settings you cancustomize:

Multi-Information Display

Keyless Memory Settings

76

TM

Page 78: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

< >

>>

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ and pressthe Select/Reset button. The displaywill change to the screen shownabove. Press the Select/Reset buttonto select ‘‘OK’’ or press the orside of the INFO button to cancel.

There are three possible settings:

OFF: The auto door lock isdeactivated all the time.

SHIFT FROM P: The doors will lockwhenever you move the shift leverout of P. (Models with automatictransmission.)

10 MPH: The doors will lock whenthe vehicle speed reaches 10 mph.

The first Keyless Memory Setting isAuto Door Lock conditions. Selectthe desired condition by moving thepointer with the side of the INFObutton. On the display, will benext to the current setting.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

77

Page 79: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The next setting menu is Auto DoorUnlocking conditions.

OFF: The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time.

SHIFT TO P: The driver’s door orall doors depending on yourselection in the next step, willunlock whenever you move theshift lever to P.

IGN OFF The driver’s door orall doors unlock when you turn theignition switch to LOCK (0).

Enter your selection by movingthe pointer with the side of theINFO button.

To designate the door(s) thatunlock under the previous step,select ‘‘DRIVER’S DOOR’’ or‘‘ALL DOORS’’ by moving thepointer with the INFO button.Then enter your selection bymoving the pointer with theside of the INFO button.

4.

1.

2.

3.

Multi-Information Display

78

Page 80: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

>>

The next setting menu is ‘‘KEYLESSLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’.

If you do not want the beeper tosound, select ‘‘BEEP OFF’’ and enteryour selection by moving the pointerwith the side of the INFO button.

The next setting menu is‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’.If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

The headlights, parking lights,taillights and license plate light turnoff after the selected time when youremove the key from the ignitionswitch and close the driver’s door.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.Select the desired relock time bymoving the pointer with the sideof the INFO button.

The last two setting menus are‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’and ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’.Select the time (‘‘0S, 15S, 30S or 60S’’) and enter your selection bypressing the Select/Reset button.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou lock the doors with the remotetransmitter, a beep will sound toverify that doors are locked and thesecurity system has set.

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

79

Page 81: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors (see page ). Selecthow long it takes for the interiorlights to fade out (in seconds) from5S, 15S, or 30S, and enter yourselection by moving the pointer withthe side of the INFO button.

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to the HFL and howto receive or make phone calls.

You can receive or make phone-callsfrom your cell phone through yourvehicle’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)system without touching your cellphone.

113

156

Multi-Information Display

HandsFreeLink

80

TM

Page 82: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

>On Canadian models onlyYou can switch the language of themulti-information display betweenFrench and English.

When the multi-information displayis in the ‘‘LANGUAGESELECTION’’ mode (screen shownabove), press the Select/Resetbutton. The display will change tothe selection screen.

Select the desired language, Frenchor English, by pressing the side ofthe INFO button, and enter yourselection by pressing the Select/Reset button.

Multi-Information Display

Language Selection

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

Page 83: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

* To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.:

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

82

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HAZARD WARNING BUTTONHEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

SEAT HEATERSWITCHES

HORN

MIRROR CONTROLS STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONS

HANDSFREELINKBUTTONS

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) OFFSWITCH

(P.84)

(P.85)

(P.203)

(P.101)(P.88) (P.150) (P.160)

(P.83)(P.86)

(P.106)

(P.153)

(P.87)

TM

Page 84: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

---

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you,and hold it. The washers sprayuntil you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed, thencomplete one more sweep afteryou release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

MIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

Windshield Washers

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

Page 85: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

-Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

The rotating switchon the left lever controls the lights.Turning this switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the parking lights,taillights, instrument panel lights,side-marker lights, and rear licenseplate lights. Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the key removed from theignition switch, you will hear areminder tone when you open thedriver’s door.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The blue high beam indicator willcome on (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams will stay on as long as youhold the lever back.

Turn SignalOffParking and instrument panelHeadlights onFog lights off (U.S. models)Fog lights on (U.S. models)High beamsFlash high beams

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

With the headlight switch off orposition, the high beam

headlights come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.

63

Canadian models only

Turn Signal and Headlights

Turn Signal

Headlights

High Beams

Daytime Running Lights

84

Page 86: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

-++-

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

Adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel by pressing theor side of the adjustment button.Press to increase the brightnessand to decrease it. You can adjustthe brightness with the headlightswitch on or off.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Pressing the MAXbutton will bring it to the maximumlevel.If your vehicle is equipped with thenavigation system, the navigationsystem screen will also go to fullbrightness. This is most useful whenusing the headlights during daylighthours.

U.S. models only

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

MAX BUTTON

ADJUSTMENT BUTTON

Page 87: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The automatic lighting off featureturns off the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

You can change this 15 second timerto 0, 30, or 60 seconds (see page ).

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

The automatic lighting off featureactivates if you leave the headlightswitch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position, remove the key, open, thenclose the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

79

Automatic Lighting Off, Hazard Warning Button

Automatic Lighting Off Feature Hazard Warning Button

86

Page 88: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The rear window defogger clears fog,frost, and thin ice from the window.Push the defogger button to turn iton and off. The indicator in thebutton comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Rear Window DefoggerInstrum

entsand

Controls

87

Page 89: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

To adjust the steering wheel:

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition, making sure the wheelpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and the indicators.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

88

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Page 90: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

The valet key works only in theignition and the driver’s door lock.You can keep the trunk pass-throughcover and the glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your key. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly an Acura-approved key blank.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Protect the key from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

KeysInstrum

entsand

Controls

89

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

VALETKEY(GRAY)

Page 91: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, you must push thekey in slightly. If your vehicle has anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in park.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

90

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Page 92: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourdealer.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go off. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

91

Page 93: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the bottom ofthe switch to lock the doors and thetop to unlock them.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock. When youpush down the lock tab on the driver’sdoor, all the doors lock.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the key, turn thekey, and release it. The remainingdoors unlock when you turn the keya second time within a few seconds.

To lock any door when getting out ofthe vehicle, pull the lock tab andclose the door.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. If you tryto lock an open driver’s door bypushing in the lock tab, all doors willunlock when you close the driver’sdoor.

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

92

Page 94: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To open the trunk, press the trunkrelease button on the left corner ofthe dashboard. To open the trunkfrom the outside, press the trunkrelease button on the remotetransmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead oris disconnected, you can open thetrunk from the rear seat by pullingthe trunk release handle. Reach thehandle through the trunk pass-through.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging it,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

, page .

To protect items in the trunk, youcan disable the trunk-release buttonon the dashboard by turning off thetrunk main switch in the glove box,locking the glove box, and lockingthe trunk pass-through cover withthe master key.

If you need to give the key tosomeone else, give them the valetkey.

53

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

Page 95: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from inside.To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

Trunk, Childproof Door Locks

Emergency Trunk Opener Childproof Door Locks

94

Page 96: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash. When you push LOCKtwice within 5 seconds, you will heara beep to verify that the doors arelocked and the security system hasset. You cannot lock the doors if anydoor is not fully closed or if the keyis in the ignition switch.

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk with theremote transmitter if the trunk mainbutton is turned off.

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany doors within 30 seconds, thedoors automatically relock and thesecurity system sets. To change thissetting, refer to Keyless MemorySettings on page .

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door or all thedoors (depending on the keylessmemory setting). Press it twice tounlock the other doors. Someexterior lights will flash twice eachtime you press the button.The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany doors within 30 seconds (orwhatever setting the relock timer isset to), the light fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

79

Remote Transmitter

LOCK

TRUNK

PANIC

UNLOCK

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LED

Page 97: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The driving position memoryactivated (Driver 1, Driver 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour desired driving position in thememory that is activated by thetransmitter you normally carry.

You can turn off this driving positionmemory activation. Press and holdthe LOCK and UNLOCK buttons atthe same time. The LED in theremote transmitter will blink twice.Then release the buttons. Doing thisalso cancels the keyless memorysettings for that remote and restoresthe default settings.

To turn it back on, repeat thisprocedure. The LED will come onfor 1 second to indicate the featurehas been turned on.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

Each remote transmitter alsoactivates the driving positionmemory system and changes thekeyless memory settings related tothat remote (see page ). Whenyou open the driver’s door afterunlocking it with the remotetransmitter, you will hear a beep.The driver’s seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored in thatmemory location. You will hear two

beeps when the movement iscompleted.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

103

Remote Transmitter

Recalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

Remote Transmitter Care

96

With Driver 1 With Driver 2

Page 98: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, place a clothon the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver. Remove the oldbattery and insert a new battery withthe side facing up. Snap the twohalves of the transmitter case backtogether.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

BATTERY

Page 99: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

-See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 14

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switch onthe driver’s seat adjusts the seatbottom in several directions. On thepassenger’s seat, the long horizontalswitch moves the seat only back andforth. The short vertical switchadjusts the seat back angle.

The short horizontal switch on thedriver’s seat adjusts the degree oflumbar support.

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Moves the seat up ordown and the rear of theseat up or down.(Driver’s seat only)

Raises or lowers the seat.(Driver’s seat only)

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.(Driver’s seat only)

Seats

Front Seat Power Adjustments

98

PASSENGER’S SEATDRIVER’S SEAT

Page 100: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

15

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

All head restraints adjust for height.The tilt of the front head restraints isalso adjustable. You need both handsto adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonsideways, and push the restraintdown. To adjust the tilt, pivot thefront head restraint to the desiredposition.

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest by movingit forward and backward. Make surethe armrest is securely latched.

Make sure your passenger’s handsor fingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

Seats

Head Restraints Armrest

Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

RELEASE BUTTON

Page 101: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .

The trunk pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key, and turn it clockwise.

53Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Trunk Pass-through Cover

Seats, Trunk Pass-through Cover

100

KNOB

COVER

Page 102: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

1.

2.

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENTSWITCH

Page 103: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch to keep yoursettings.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Depending on the position of theselector switch, the left or right sidemirror will pivot downward slightlywhen you shift the transmission intoreverse. In the left position, the leftmirror pivots. In the right position,the right mirror pivots. This givesyou a better view of that side of thevehicle while parallel parking. Themirror returns to its original positionwhen you take the transmission outof reverse. To turn this feature off,leave the switch in the centerposition.

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

3.

103

Mirrors

Power Mirror Heaters

102

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

Page 104: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Two seat and outside mirrorpositions can be stored in separatememories. You select a memorizedposition by pushing the appropriatebutton or using the appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2).

Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew driving position in thememory unless the ignition switchis in the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Press and release the MEMObutton on the driver’s door. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent positions of the driver’sseat and outside mirrors are nowstored.

3.

1.

2.98

101

CONTINUED

Driving Position Memory System

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

MEMO BUTTON

MEMORY BUTTONS

Page 105: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Readjusting the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Make sure the parking brake is set(M/T) or the shift lever is in Park(A/T).

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps, and the indicator willremain on.

If the parking brake is not set, youmust press and hold the memorybutton until the adjustment iscomplete.

You cannot select a memorizedposition if the transmission is inreverse. Shift to another gear,then select.

1.

2.

Notes for vehicles with M/T

Driving Position Memory System

Selecting a Memorized Position

104

MEMORY BUTTONS

Page 106: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1, or 2.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this driving positionfor later use, you must store it in thedriving position memory.

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.

Shift out of Park (automatictransmission), or into reverse(manual transmission).

Adjust the outside mirrors.

Driving Position Memory SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

105

Page 107: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use them. Pushthe HI side of the switch to rapidlyheat up the seat. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,push the LO side of the switch. Thiswill keep the seat warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Seat Heaters

106

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

Page 108: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.

The windows will operate for up to10 minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either frontdoor cancels this function.

If the MAIN switch is off, thepassenger’s windows cannot beraised or lowered. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe vehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

CONTINUED

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

107

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAINSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 109: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

- If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or a frontwindow fuse is removed, the AUTOfunction is disabled. The powerwindow system needs to be resetafter reconnecting the battery orinstalling the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the front window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull and hold the front windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

If either front window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

To open/close either frontwindow, push the window switchfirmly down or pull back on to thesecond detent, and release it. Thewindow will automatically go up ordown all the way. To stop thewindow, pull/push on the windowswitch briefly.

1.

2.

Power Windows

Auto ReverseAUTO

108

Page 110: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

You can open all of the windows andthe moonroof from outside with theremote transmitter.

You can open and close the windowsand moonroof with the key in thedriver’s door lock.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows andmoonroof start to open. To stopthe windows and the moonroof,release the key.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To open:

To open the windows andmoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 15 seconds).

NOTE: If the windows and moonroofstop before the desired position,repeat steps 2 and 3.

To close the windows andmoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 15 seconds).

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and the moonroof start toclose. To stop the windows andmoonroof, release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To close:

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows and moonroof startto open. To stop the windows andmoonroof, release the button.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again and hold it. If thewindows and the moonroof stopbefore the desired position, repeatsteps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remotetransmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.1.

2.

3.

4.

Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the RemoteTransmitter

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Key

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

109

UNLOCK BUTTON

Close

Open

Page 111: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.Make sure everyone’s hands are

away from the moonroof beforeopening or closing it.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull back or push forwardthe moonroof switch lightly and holdit. The moonroof will stop when yourelease the switch.

To tilt the moonroof, press straightup on the center of the switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting fullyopen, press the switch a second time.

To slide the moonroof open, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof automatically opensall the way. To stop the moonrooffrom opening fully, push the switchforward briefly.

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe switch firmly forward. Themoonroof automatically closes all theway. To stop the moonroof fromclosing fully, pull back the switchbriefly.

Auto Reverse

Moonroof

110

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

Page 112: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

You can use the remote transmitteror the key to operate the moonrooffrom the outside. Refer to page

for details.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

107

Operating the Moonroof with theRemote Transmitter or the Key

MoonroofInstrum

entsand

Controls

111

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

Page 113: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

The clock displays the time with theignition switch in the ON (II)position. If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to reset the clock.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The clock is set automatically.

Change the hour by pressing andholding the H button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minutes by pressing andholding the M button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press the Rbutton to set the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

60

On models without Navigation System

On models with Navigation System

Clock Parking Brake

Clock, Parking Brake

112

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.

Page 114: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The front ceiling light has a three-position switch; ON, Door Activated,and OFF.

When neither side is pushed in(Door Activated), the lights come onwhen you:

Open any door.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

After all doors are closed tightly,both front and rear ceiling lightsfade out in 5, 15, or 30 secondsdepending on your custom setting(see page ).

Both front and rear ceiling lightswork as individual map lights. Toturn a map light on or off, press itslens. You can use the front maplights regardless of the position ofthe front ceiling light switch.

With the front ceiling light switch inthe OFF position, the rear map lightsdo not work, and the interior lightsdo not come on when you open adoor.

When the ‘‘ ’’ side is pushed in,the lights are off all the time.

When the ‘‘ ’’ side of the switchis pushed in, both front and rearceiling lights are ON all the time.

80

Ceiling Light

Interior LightsInstrum

entsand

Controls

113

Page 115: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Interior Convenience Items

114

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE COMPARTMENTFRONT DOOR POCKET

BEVERAGEHOLDERS

SEAT-BACK POCKETSACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

Page 116: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding its cover backward.

The rear beverage holder is in therear seat armrest. Open thebeverage holder by pushing the frontof it, and pulling the holder all theway out.

There are two accessory powersockets. One is in the front of thecenter console under the utilitypocket lid. The other is under thearmrest in the console compartmentstorage area.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Accessory Power SocketsBeverage Holders

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

115

Page 117: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

The coin holder inside the consolecompartment is removable. Toremove it, pull it up. The coin holdercan also be stored in either frontdoor pocket.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever, and lift thearmrest. To open the consolecompartment storage area, pull upon the left lever, and lift the armrest.To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

Glove Box Console Compartment

Interior Convenience Items

116

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 118: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The interior of each front door hasan extendable pocket for maps andother small, lightweight items. Eachpocket also has a sunglasses holder.You can remove the sunglassesholder to make more room in thepocket.

Front Door Pockets

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

117

Page 119: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

118

Page 120: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The climate control systems in yourvehicle provide a comfortable drivingenvironment in all weatherconditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourvehicle.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 120.............................Airflow Buttons . 122.............................Climate Control . 125

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 127............AM/FM Radio Reception . 132

Playing the XM Satellite Radio............................(U.S. models) . 134

.................................Playing Discs . 140..................Protecting Your Discs . 145

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 146...............................Playing a Tape . 147

................Remote Audio Controls . 150.................Radio Theft Protection . 151

............................Security System . 152...............................Cruise Control . 153

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 156

.............................HandsFreeLink . 160

FeaturesF

eatures

119

Page 121: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Vents, Heating, and A/C

120

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

Vehicles without Navigation System

DUAL BUTTON

DRIVER’S AUTO BUTTON PASSENGER’S AUTO BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTBUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

Page 122: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Vents, Heating, and A/CF

eatures

121

OFF BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

Vehicles with Navigation System

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDEMODE CONTROL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

PASSENGER’S AUTO BUTTONDRIVER’S AUTO BUTTON TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Page 123: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated usingthe voice control system. SeeNavigation section in your QuickStart Guide for an overview of thissystem and the Navigation Systemmanual for complete details.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior isrecirculated throughout the system.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

The driver’s side temperature andpassenger’s side temperature can beset separately. Press either side’sbutton to increase the temperatureof airflow. Press either side’sbutton to decrease it. When you setthe temperature to its lower limit orits upper limit, it will be displayed as‘‘Lo’’ or ‘‘Hi’’.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. The A/CON indicator comes on in the displaywhen the A/C is on.

Press the button to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease them.

87

Only on models equipped withNavigation System

Airflow Buttons

Voice Control System Recirculation Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Temperature Control Buttons

Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonFan Control Buttons

122

Page 124: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to maximum.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control buttons.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.The driver’s side mode andpassenger’s side mode can beselected separately when the dualbutton is pressed. However, when

is selected on the driver’sside, mode selection on thepassenger’s side is not possible.

When is selected, thepassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.

You can set the temperatures andmodes for the driver’s side and thepassenger’s side separately whenthis button is pressed (indicator on).When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature andmode with the driver’s sidetemperature control buttons andmode control button.

Use the mode control button toselect the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches tofresh air mode.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Ventilation

Using the Heater

Dual Button

Mode Control Button

Features

123

Page 125: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To remove fog from inside thewindows:

Select . When you select, the system automatically

switches to fresh air mode andturns on the A/C. (The A/C ONindicator will not come on in U.S.vehicles, if the A/C was off tostart with.)Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C turns off. Butif it was on to start with, it stays on.

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum heat.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

66

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

If the interior is very warm,

Vents, Heating, and A/C

To Defog and DefrostDehumidify the InteriorUsing the A/C

124

Page 126: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When the AUTO button on thedriver’s side is pressed, thetemperature control buttons on thepassenger’s side are disabled, andthe interior temperature is regulatedto the temperature set on the driver’sside. When the AUTO button on thepassenger’s side is pressed,temperature can be set on the driver’sside and passenger’s side separately.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. (TheA/C indicator will not come on inU.S. vehicles, if the A/C was off tostart with.)Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

Press the AUTO button.Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control buttons.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

To clear the windshield faster, youcan close the dashboard corner ventsby rotating the wheel below eachvent. This sends more warm air tothe windshield defroster vents. Oncethe windshield is clear, select freshair mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.2.

1.

2.3.

On models with Navigation System

Climate Control

To Cool or Heat Automatically

Using Automatic Climate Control

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Features

125

Page 127: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of AUTO modeand starts to run at its lowest speed.Press the button to makethe fan run faster.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

Climate Control

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Semi-automatic Operation

To Turn Everything Off

126

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Page 128: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

127

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

AM/FMBUTTON

SAT RADIOBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

VOL/PWR KNOB

SCANBUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOBPRESET BUTTONS

VOL/PWR KNOB

SCANBUTTON

FMBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

AM BUTTON

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

U.S. Models (with Navigation System) Canadian Models (without Navigation System)

Page 129: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

+ -

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or SEEK button, thenrelease it.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button, ortouch the SCAN icon (models withnavigation system), then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 5 seconds. When it plays astation you want to listen to, pressthe SCAN button again.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button onCanadian model). On the FM band,ST will be displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing theVOL/PWR knob or the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button onCanadian model). Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The audio system for your vehiclecan also be operated using the voicecontrol system. See Navigationsection in your Quick Start Guide foran overview of this system and theNavigation System manual forcomplete details.

Only on models equipped withNavigation System

Playing the AM/FM Radio

SEEK

SCAN

To Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

TUNE

To Play the AM/FM Radio

Voice Control System

128

Page 130: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

- -Each of the six presetbuttons or preset icons (on modelswith navigation system) can storeone frequency on AM (LW, MW)and two frequencies on FM.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button or theAUTO SELECT icon (models withnavigation system). ‘‘A.SEL’’ (AUTOSEL) flashes in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

press theA.SEL button (AUTO SELECT icon).This restores the presets youoriginally set.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton (icon).

Pick a preset button (icon), andhold it until you hear a beep.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed or see nostation number on the preset iconsafter pressing a preset button (icon)if auto select cannot find a strongstation for every preset button.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons). Use the TUNE,SEEK, or SCAN functions to findstations, then store them in thepreset buttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off Auto Select,

CONTINUED

Preset AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

129

Page 131: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

-On models without Navigation System

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE/SOUNDknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Use the TREB/BASS modes to adjust the tone toyour liking.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjust the side-to-side strength,and FADE adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from the centerspeaker and the subwoofer speaker.

If you turn the TUNE/SOUND knoball the way to the left, you will see‘‘OFF’’ in the display, and the centerspeaker and/or subwoofer speakerwill be off.

Bass, treble, balance, and fader areeach adjustable. In addition, you canadjust the strength of the soundcoming from the center and thesubwoofer speakers.

Press the TUNE/SOUND knobrepeatedly to display the bass(BASS), treble (TREB), balance(BAL), fader (FADE), center(CNTR) and subwoofer (SUBW)setting.

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Center/Subwoofer

Playing the AM/FM Radio

130

ADJUSTMENT LEVEL

Page 132: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

On models with Navigation System

To adjust them, enter the sound gridby touching the SOUND icon on thedisplay or pressing the TUNE/SOUND knob.

To see the audio screen when youare finished adjusting the sound,touch the RETURN icon, or wait 5seconds.

Bass, treble, left/right balance, andfront/rear fader are each adjustable.In addition, you can adjust thestrength of the sound coming fromthe center and the subwooferspeakers.

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/rightbalance adjust the side-to-sidestrength, while front/rear faderadjust the front-to-back strength. Toadjust the left/right balance, touchthe left or right icon on the sound

grid. When you touch an icon, theyellow bars on the grid turn orangeand move toward the icon, changingthe balance left or right. At this point,you can also use the TUNE/SOUNDknob to adjust the balance. Toequalize the balance, touch the leftor right icon until each side has anorange bar at the center of the soundgrid.To adjust the front/rear fader, touchthe front or rear icon on the soundgrid. When you touch an icon, theyellow bars on the grid turn orangeand move toward the icon, changingthe fader to the front or rear. At thispoint, you can also use the TUNE/SOUND knob to adjust the balance.To equalize the fader, touch thefront or rear icon until each side hasan orange bar at the center of thesound grid.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or on eachside of the treble or bass adjustmentbar. Then continue pressing or

, or turn the TUNE/SOUNDknob. The adjustment bar shows youthe current setting.

To adjust thesound from the subwoofer or centerspeaker, touch or icon oneach side of the subwoofer or centeradjustment bar. Then continuepressing or , or turn the

TUNE/SOUND knob. Theadjustment bar shows you thecurrent setting.

Playing the AM/FM Radio

Left/Right Balance, and Front/Rear Fader

Treble/Bass

Subwoofer/Center

Features

131

FADER ADJUST ICON

CENTER ADJUST ICON

SUBWOOFERADJUST ICON

BALANCEADJUSTICON

TREBLEADJUSTICON

BASS ADJUSTICON

Page 133: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Your vehicle’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.

How well your vehicle’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, andatmospheric conditions.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

132

Page 134: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

133

Page 135: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

134

TUNE KNOB

SATELLITERADIOBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET BUTTONS

SCANICON

MODEICON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

CATEGORYBUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

SCANBUTTON

SATELLITERADIOBUTTON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

CATEGORYBUTTONS

PWR/VOL KNOB

without Navigation System with Navigation System

Page 136: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

○ ○ -- +

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.XM is a registered trade mark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

To switch between thechannel mode and the categorymode, press and hold the DISP/MODE button until the modechanges. On models with navigationsystem, touch the MODE icon on theaudio display.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

On models with navigation system,push the AUDIO button to displayXM information on the screen.

Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

In thecategory mode, press either buttonto select another category.

XM radio receives signals from twosatellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, XM radioallows you to view channel andcategory selections in the display.

To listen to XM radio, turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position. Push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the

button. Adjust the volumeby turning the PWR/VOL knob. Thelast channel you listened to will showin the display.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

MODE

TUNE

CATEGORY ( or )

Operating the Satellite Radio

Features

135

Page 137: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

-- Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the button again.The other XM band will show.Store the next six channels usingsteps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton (icon) to tune to it.

You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons or preset icons (on modelswith navigation system). Each buttonstores one channel from the XM1band and one channel from the XM2band.

To store a channel:Press the button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will show in thedisplay.

Use the TUNE knob, or theCATEGORY or SCAN buttons totune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

The SCAN function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem). The system plays eachchannel in numerical order for 5seconds, then selects the nextchannel. When you hear a channelyou want to continue listening to,press the button or touch the iconagain.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

PresetSCAN

136

Page 138: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

The signal iscurrently tooweak. Move thevehicle to an areaaway from tallbuildings, andwith anunobstructed viewof the southernhorizon.

The selected channelnumber does not exist oris not part of yoursubscription, or thischannel has no artist ortitle information at thistime.

There is a problemwith the XMantenna. Pleaseconsult your dealer.

XM is loading theaudio or programinformation.

The channelcurrently selected isno longerbroadcasting.

The encryptioncode is beingupdated. Waituntil theencryption code isfully updated.Channels 0 and 1should still worknormally.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’

‘‘ - - - - ’’

‘‘ANTENNA’’

‘‘LOADING’’

‘‘OFF AIR’’

‘‘UPDATING’’

Features

137

Page 139: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

138

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Page 140: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the button.A variety of music types and styleswill play.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, you shouldbe able to listen to XM radiobroadcasts. XM Radio will continueto send an activation signal to yourvehicle for at least 12 hours from theactivation request. If the service hasnot been activated after 36 hours,contact XM Radio.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect XM radioreception.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com

Receiving Satellite Radio Service

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

139

Page 141: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

++

--

Playing Discs

140

DISCBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

EJECTBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

DISCSLOT

DISC BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTONDISC BUTTONRANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

DISCSLOT

CD/DVD BUTTON

U.S. Models (with Navigation System) Canadian Models (without Navigation System)

REPEATBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

DISC/TAPEBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

EJECTBUTTON

AMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

Page 142: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The disc changer can play these discformats:

CDCD-RDVD-ADTS

DVD-A discs not meeting DVDverification standards may not beplayable.The changer cannot play DVD-V,DVD-R/RW, MP3, or WMA formats.Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’are registered trademarks of DigitalTheater System, Inc.

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer that holds up tosix discs. You operate this discchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To operate the discchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

With the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position, press and hold the LOADbutton until you hear a beep andsee ‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, thenrelease the button.

Insert a disc into the slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

When the ‘‘DISC LOAD’’ appearsin the display, insert the next discinto the slot.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will then

begin playing the last disc loaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 15 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and thegreen load indicator comes on.When you see ‘‘LOAD’’ in thedisplay, insert the disc into the slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway.

Press and release the LOADbutton.

To load a single disc:1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Loading Discs in the Changer

Playing Discs

141

TM

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

Page 143: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

- +

-+

Select the disc changer by pressingthe DISC/TAPE button (U.S.models) or CD/DVD button(Canadian models). The system willbegin playing the last selected disc inthe disc changer. You will see thedisc and track numbers displayed.

To select a different disc when all sixpositions are loaded, use the preset 5(DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC )button. Otherwise, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons or icons. On models withnavigation system, you can alsotouch the appropriate disc icon (16) to select a different disc.

When you press and hold the SCANbutton until you see D-SCAN in thedisplay, or when you touch the DISCSCAN icon on the audio display(models with navigation system), thefirst track of the current disc playsfor about 10 seconds. You will see D-SCAN (DISC SCAN) in the display.To hear the rest of the disc, pressthe SCAN button or touch DISCSCAN again, within 10 seconds. Ifyou don’t, the system advances tothe next disc, plays about 10 secondsof it, and continues throughout therest of the discs the same way.When the system reaches the lastdisc, DISC SCAN is cancelled, andthe disc you originally had on playsnormally.

Each time you press and release theSEEK button, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release the SEEKbutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track or toskip back to previous track.

When you press the SCAN button ortouch the TRACK SCAN icon on theaudio display (models withnavigation system), the first track ofthe current disc plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN(TRACK SCAN) highlighted in thedisplay. To hear the rest of the track,press the SCAN button or touchTRACK SCAN again within 10seconds. If you don’t, the systemadvances to the next track, playsabout 10 seconds of it, and continuesthrough the rest of the tracks thesame way.

The preset 5 (DISC ) and preset 6(DISC ) buttons are for use withan optional, external CD changer.

To Play a Disc To Change Tracks Disc Scan

Track Scan

Playing DiscsF

eatures

142

Page 144: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM/FM button (AM orFM button on Canadian models),press the button (U.S.models), or insert a tape in the tapeplayer. To return to disc mode, pressthe DISC/TAPE button (CD/DVDbutton on Canadian models).

When you press the RPT button ortouch the TRACK RPT icon on theaudio display (models withnavigation system), the systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. As a reminder, you will seeREPEAT (TRACK REPEAT) in thedisplay. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button, or touchTRACK REPEAT again. If you turn the system off while a

disc is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

When you press and hold the RPTbutton until D-RPT is in the display,or when you touch the DISC RPTicon on the audio display (modelswith navigation system), the systemcontinuously replays the current disc.To turn this feature off, press theRPT button or touch DISC RPTagain.

You can also play DVD-As in youraudio system the same way asplaying discs.

When you press the RDM button ortouch the TRACK RDM icon(models with navigation system), thesystem plays the tracks of thecurrent disc in random order. Youwill see RDM (TRACK RANDOM)in the display. To turn this featureoff, press the RDM button (touchthe TRACK RDM icon) again.

Track Repeat Random Play To Stop Playing a Disc

Disc RepeatPlaying a DVD

Playing Discs

143

Page 145: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button (touching theappropriate disc icon on models withnavigation system). When that discbegins playing, press the eject button.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the system beeps.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system automatically beginsthe load sequence so you can loadanother disc in that position. If youdo not load another disc within 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode [AM, FM1, FM2,tape, or XM Radio (U.S. models)].

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put thedisc changer in pause mode. Tobegin playing the disc, press the discbutton.

Removing Discs from theChanger

Playing DiscsF

eatures

144

Page 146: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality discs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the disc changer.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

145

Page 147: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

MessageIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

Cause Solution

FOCUS error.

No CD in the changer.

Mechanical error.

High temperature.

Press the disc eject button and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Insert a disc or discs.

Press the disc eject button and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be remove, consult yourdealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Changer Error MessagesF

eatures

146

Page 148: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Playing a Tape

147

DOLBY BUTTON

CD/DVD BUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

PLAY/PROGRAM BUTTON

Canadian Models (without Navigation System)U.S. Models (with Navigation System)

FAST FORWARD BUTTON

FAST FORWARD BUTTONDOLBY BUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

EJECTBUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

PLAY/PROGRAM BUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

DISC/TAPEBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

FMBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

AMBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

TAPE BUTTON

Page 149: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

▲ -

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Make sure the open side ofthe tape is facing right, then insertthe tape most of the way into the slot.The system will pull the tape in therest of the way and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator in thedisplay comes on to show you whichside of the tape is playing. Theindicates the side you insertedupward is now playing. If you want toplay the other side, press the PLAY/PROG (preset 2) button or touch thePLAY/PROG icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem). When the player reachesthe end of the tape, it willautomatically reverse direction andplay the other side.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator and NR icon (models

with navigation system) will come onin the display. If the tape was notrecorded in Dolby, turn it off bypressing the (preset 4) buttonor touching the NR icon on the audiodisplay. Dolby remains off until youpress the button (touch the icon)again.

To remove the tape, press theEJECT button. If you want to turnthe player off, press the VOL/PWRknob or turn off the ignition. Thetape will remain in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, thetape will begin playing where it leftoff.

To switch to the radio, Satellite

Radio (U.S. models) or disc changerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM button (AM or FM buttonon Canadian models), buttonor DISC/TAPE button (CD/DVDbutton on Canadian models). Tochange back to the tape player, pressthe DISC/TAPE button (TAPE/AUX button on Canadian models).

To rewind the tape,push the (preset 1 ) button ortouch the REW icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem). You will see REW in thedisplay (TAPE REW on models withnavigation system). To fast forwardthe tape, push the (preset 3)button or touch the FF icon. You willsee FF displayed (TAPE FF onmodels with navigation system).Press the , , or PLAY/PROG button (icon) to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To Play a Tape

To Stop Playing a Tape

FF/REWTape Search Function

Playing a TapeF

eatures

148

Page 150: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

- -

Press the SEEK buttonto find the beginning of the currentsong or passage. Press the SEEKbutton to find the beginning of thenext song or passage. When thesystem reaches the beginning of asong or passage, it begins to play it.

Press the RPT buttonor touch the RPT icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem) to continuously play a songor passage. You will see RPTdisplayed. The track will repeat untilyou press the RPT button or iconagain.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination build up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

SKIP

REPEAT

Caring for the Player and Tapes

Playing a Tape

149

NOTE:

Page 151: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

▲ ▼

+-

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

If you are playing a tape, press thetop ( ) of the CH button to advanceto the next selection. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious selection. The systemsenses a silent period, then goesback to play mode.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM Radio (U.S. models), a disc (if adisc is loaded), or a tape (if a tape isloaded).

Remote Audio ControlsF

eatures

150

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

Page 152: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, your dealercan access your code with yourradio’s serial number. To access theserial number, turn the radio on. Itmust display ‘‘CODE’’, then turn the

radio off. Push the preset 1, preset 6,and power buttons at the same time,then quickly release. The serialnumber will appear in two sets offour digits.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you should happen to lose the card,you must obtain the code numberfrom your dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

Radio Theft Protection

151

Page 153: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator next to the driver’s doorlock starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk is opened with the trunkrelease button on the driver’s door,the trunk release handle behind thetrunk pass-through cover, or theemergency trunk opener.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or use theremote transmitter.

Once the security system is set,opening any door or the hoodwithout using the key or the remotetransmitter will cause the system toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the door and trunk openmonitor on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ) to see if thedoors and trunk are fully closed.Since it is not part of the monitordisplay, manually check the hood.

69

Security SystemF

eatures

152

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Page 154: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel comes onto show the system is nowactivated.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel cruise control. To resumethe set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel comes on.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on.

1.

2.

3.Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

153

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Page 155: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To increase the speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle speeds up about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle slows down about 1mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel goes out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the DECEL/SET button.

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes cruise control tocancel.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise ControlF

eatures

154

Page 156: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem remembers the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), then press and releasethe RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson, and the vehicle accelerates to thesame cruising speed as before.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

155

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

Page 157: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. They do nothave the safety feature that causes

the motor to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury.

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red indicator inHomeLink.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.

1.

2.

Before you begin

General Information

Important Safety Precautions

Training HomeLink

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

156

Page 158: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1

second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:Go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

158

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

157

Page 159: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

Features

158

TRAINING BUTTON

Page 160: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

1.

2.

157

Erasing Codes

Customer AssistanceRetraining a Button

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

159

Page 161: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while making a call,the HFL over-rides the audio system.To change the volume level, use theaudio system volume knob.

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the front seatspotlights. On models withnavigation system, the microphone isshared with the navigation system.

Here are the main components ofthe HFL system:

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Your vehicle is equipped with theHandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL usesBluetooth technology as a wirelesslink between it and your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. When you arein your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy safe,hands-free phone use.

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 3 Bluetooth,which means the maximam rangebetween your phone and vehicke is30 feet ( 10 meters).

To use the HFL, your phone musthave Bluetooth capability along withthe Hands Free Profile. This type ofphone is available through manyphone makers and cellular carriers.You can also find an approved phoneby visiting

InCanada, visit

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

163

163

www.acura.com/handsfreelink (www.acura.ca.).

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Audio System

Microphone

Phonebook

Voice Control

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

160

TM

Page 162: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

* -

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. Onnavigation-equipped vehicles, thereare two sets of buttons: one for thenavigation, climate control, and audiosystems, and the other for the HFL. Signal Strength Indicates the

network signal strength of thecurrent phone call. Five barsequals full strength.

Here is the function of each HFLbutton:

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

When you are operating the HFL, orwhen you manually scroll throughthe multi-information display andselect HFL, you will see thisinformation on the screen:

HFL Buttons Multi-Information Display

HandsFreeLink

161

NAVIGATIONSYSTEMBUTTONS

HFL TALKBUTTON

SIGNALSTLENGTH

PHONE DIALING

BATTERY LEVELSTATUS

HFLMODE

HFL BACKBUTTON

ROAM STATUSRefer to your navigation systemmanual.

TM

Page 163: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicatesthe power remaining in yourphone’s current battery charge.Five bars equals full batterystrength.

HFL Mode Indicates when youare dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones will not send thisinformation to the HFL.

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone call. Five barsequals full strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Some phones will not send thisinformation to the HFL.

Phone Indicates a phone iscurrently linked to the HFL.

This information is displayedwhether or not the phone is beingused:

:

:

On models without Navigation SystemCenter Console Display

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

162

ROAM STATUS

PHONE

SIGNALSTLENGTH

TM

Page 164: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide easy-to-useinstructions for all basic features ofthe HFL.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’The next time you press the Talkbutton, the HFL begins from itsmain menu.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree link help.’’

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, and 11.

For best system operation, set theclimate control fan speed to low,and direct the center vents awayfrom the microphone in the ceiling.

To enter a command, press theTalk button. Then, after the beep,say your command in a clear,natural tone.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

All phones may notoperate identically, and some maycause inconsistent operation of theHFL.

How to Use the HFL

Using Voice Control

HandsFreeLink

163

NOTE:

TM

Page 165: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four digitcode you want to set. For example,say ‘‘9.7.5.3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘9.7.5.3. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ HFLresponse is, ‘‘Security is enabled.Each time the vehicle is turned on,the passcode will be required touse the system. The system set upis complete. Returning to the mainmenu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is,‘‘A passcode hasnot been set. What is the four digitnumber you would like to set asyour passcode?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ If you choose ‘‘Ringtone’’ the HFL response is ‘‘A ringtone will be used’’. ‘‘A securityoption is available to lock theHandsFreeLink system. Each timethe vehicle is turned on, apasscode would be required to usethis system. Would you like thissecurity option turned on?’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likethe notification to be a ring tone orprompt?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

2.

1.

4.

5.

3. 6.

7.

8.

To set up the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Setting Up the System

164

TM

Page 166: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Searching for aBluetooth phone.’’

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Search mode. Thephone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone set up optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free calls.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.

The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, or talk to yourphone retailer.

Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.

During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

1. 4.

5.

6.

2.

3.

HandsFreeLink

Pairing Your Phone

Features

165

NOTE:NOTE:

TM

Page 167: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

2.3.

4.1.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

7.

8.

To delete a paired phone, do this:

To rename a paired phone, do this:

HandsFreeLink

166

TM

Page 168: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If no other phones arefound, the first phone remainslinked.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When allphones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

2.

1.1.

2.

1.

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

167

TM

Page 169: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say

‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

1.

3.

3.

1.

2.

2.

4.

4.

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

Making a Call

HandsFreeLink

168

TM

Page 170: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

The HFL allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFL phonebook for easy retrievalduring menu-driven calls.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press the Talk button toanswer it. When you do this, theoriginal call is placed on hold. Toreturn to the original call, press theTalk button again. If you don’t wantto answer the new call, disregard it,and continue with your original call.If you want to hang up the originalcall and answer the new call, pressthe Back button.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The dialtones will be sent, and the call willcontinue.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

3.

To send a number during a call, do this:

To send a name during a call, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Receiving a CallSending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

Features

169

TM

Page 171: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from the HFLto the phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from yourphone to the HFL.

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscanceled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store upto 50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any typesof numbers. For example, you canstore a phone number and use it tomake a call, or you can store anaccount number and use it duringa call to a menu-driven phonesystem.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891.’’ Say ‘‘Enter.’’ or continue toadd numbers.

2.

3.

1.

1.

2.

4.

2.

1.

To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

To add a name, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Transferring a Call

Muting a Call

Setting up the Phonebook

170

TM

Page 172: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ Say ‘‘Enter.’’ orcontinue to add numbers.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

2.

1.

4. 3.

4.5.

1.2.

1.

3.

5.

To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:

To edit the number of a name, do this:

To delete a name, do this:

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

171

TM

Page 173: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, andclear the passcode. Is this whatyou would like to do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. Whenthe end of the list is reached, theHFL response is, ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,and all names in the HFL phonebook.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, and thepasscode. This may take up to 2minutes to complete.’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed,otherwise say ‘‘Go back’’ or‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

2.

3.

4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

To clear the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Clearing the System

172

TM

Page 174: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

<>

<>

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFL response is‘‘English or Français?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Français.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Vous avezsélectionné Français. Les nomsenregistrés en mode Anglais neseront pas accessible en modeFrançais. Voulez-vous continuer?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui.’’ If thereare no paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘La langue a étéchangée. Retour au menu principal.’’

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Pour que le systèmeidentifie les téléphones qui ont étéjumelés dans une autre langue, lesnoms des téléphones doivent êtreré-enregistrés.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags thefollowing prompts will continue.

The HFL response is, for example,‘‘Quel est le nom Français pourPaul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est lenom Français pour Pat’s phone

?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. Say ‘‘Téléphone de Pat.’’After all paired phones missing aFrench name tag are re-recorded,the HFL will prompt, ‘‘Retour aumenu principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘ChangerLangue.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘English or Français?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘You haveselected English. Name tags thatwere stored while in French modewill not be accessible in Englishmode. Would you like tocontinue?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If thereare no paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

2.

3.

2.

1.

3.

4.

1.

To change from French to English, dothis:

To change from English to French, dothis:

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Changing Language(Canadian Models Only)

Features

173

NOTE:

TM

Page 175: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

<>

<>

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language has beenchanged. For the system to identifyphones that were paired while inanother language, the phone namesneed to be re-recorded.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags thefollowing prompts will continue.

The HFL says, for example, ‘‘Whatis the English name forTéléphone de Paul ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Téléphone dePat ?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’sphone.’’ After all paired phonesmissing an English name tag arere-recorded, the HFL will say‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

4.

HandsFreeLink

174

NOTE:

TM

Page 176: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 176.................Fuel Recommendation . 176

.........Service Station Procedures . 177....................................Refueling . 177

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 178

...................................Oil Check . 179.............Engine Coolant Check . 180

...............................Fuel Economy . 180...Accessories and Modifications . 181

.............................Carrying Cargo . 183

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

175

Page 177: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour dealer for service.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not change the oil until themulti-information display indicatesit is needed.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane of 91 or higher. Use ofa lower octane gasoline can causeoccasional metallic knocking noisesin the engine and will result indecreased engine performance. Useof a gasoline with a pump octane lessthan 87 can lead to engine damage.

We recommend quality gasolinescontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

176

Page 178: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the knob on the cap in thenotch on the fuel fill door.

If your notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station, or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise the engine speed by shifting toa lower gear.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

1.

2.

3.

4.On TL with manual transmission

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

Before

Driving

177

Pull

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 179: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers between the frontedge of the hood and the frontgrille to locate the hood latchhandle. Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

1.

2. 3.

5.

6.

257

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

178

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

Page 180: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

To close the hood, lower it to about afoot (30 cm) above the fender, thenpress down firmly with your hands.Make sure the hood is securelylatched.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

4.

1.

2.

3

218

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

Before

Driving

179

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

Page 181: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages given by the multi-information display. See

on page.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

221

212

212

For example,

Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Engine Coolant Check

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

180

RESERVE TANK

MIN

MAX

Page 182: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Although non-Acura accessories mayfit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation of your vehicle.

259Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

181

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 183: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura components could seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling,stability, and reliability.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Acura suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Non-Acura wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and problems withthe tire pressure monitoringsystem.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

182

Page 184: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxFront door and seat-back pocketsConsole compartmentTrunkRoof-rack (if installed)

In addition, the trunk pass-throughallows you to carry longer items.However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

183

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET GLOVE BOX

Page 185: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

- ×

Steps for determining correct loadlimit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.[The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.]

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. Forexample, if the maximum load is850 lbs and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.[850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.]

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in the vehicle.(Five is seating capacity of yourvehicle.)

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 pounds or 395 kilograms.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S.A, 395 kgfor Canada. This figure includes thetotal weight of all occupants, cargo,and accessories.

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedin the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity instep 4.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,and cargo must not exceed the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) orthe Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). Both are on a label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

1.

5.

3.

2.

4.

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

184

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 186: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

Do not put any items on top of thetrunk panel. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.To use the cargo net, hook it to thebuttons on the floor and sides of thetrunk. You can use the cargo net inseveral configurations by hooking itto different buttons. There is also aside net that can be used on eitherside of the trunk.When you are not using the cargonet, store it in the pocket in the sparetire tool case.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

53

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Cargo NetsCarrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment

Before

Driving

185

CARGO NETSIDE NET

TRUNK HOOK BUTTONS

Page 187: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

186

Page 188: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and the automatictransmission. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle, the braking system, thevehicle stability assist (VSA) systemand the tire pressure monitoringsystem.

........................Preparing to Drive . 188.......................Starting the Engine . 189

...................Manual Transmission . 190..............Automatic Transmission . 193

...........................................Parking . 199.............................Braking System . 200

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 201Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 202Tire Pressure Monitoring

........................System (TPMS) . 204...........................Towing a Trailer . 206

DrivingD

riving

187

Page 189: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the multi-informationdisplay (see page , and

).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

16

59 68

9.

10.98

101

88

73

Preparing to Drive

Driving188

Page 190: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.Without touching the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Starting the EngineD

riving

189

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .91

Page 191: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift fromfifth to reverse instead of sixth (seepage ). When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

191

The engine can be damaged ifyou inadvertently downshift into thewrong gear (for example, going fromthird gear at high rpms to second gearinstead of upshifting to fourth gear; theengine speed limiter will not work in thissituation).

Manual Transmission

190

Note:

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Page 192: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

17 mph (27 km/h)27 mph (43 km/h)36 mph (58 km/h)41 mph (66 km/h)44 mph (71 km/h)

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

The manual transmission has anelectric lockout so you cannotaccidentally shift from fifth toreverse instead of sixth while thevehicle is moving.

CONTINUED

Engine Speed LimiterRecommended Shift Points Reverse Lockout

Manual TransmissionD

riving

191

Page 193: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Manual Transmission

192

Page 194: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in. The illuminated numbernext to the ‘‘L’’ indicator shows youthe gear you have selected in theSequential SportShift mode.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal. Youcannot shift out of Park when theignition switch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.Avoid rapid acceleration, and havethe transmission checked by yourdealer as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

193

Page 195: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

- -

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.

For faster acceleration when in D,you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down one,two or three gears, depending onyour speed.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

Press the brakepedal to shift from Park to reverse.To shift from neutral to reverse,come to a complete stop and thenshift.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toreverse from neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 5 6 mph (8 10km/h).

If you cannot shift to reverse whenthe vehicle is stopped, press thebrake pedal, slowly shift to neutral,and then shift to reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’s

battery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to

on page ).

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle and apply the parking brake.Press on the brake pedal when youare moving the shift lever fromneutral to another gear.

197

197

To shift from:P to R

R to NN to DD to LL to DD to NN to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.

Drive (D)

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Shift Lock Release

Neutral (N)

Automatic Transmission

194

Page 196: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission will start infirst gear and then automaticallyupshift to second gear. You have tomanually upshift between secondand fifth gears. Make sure youupshift before the engine speedreaches the tachometer’s red zone.The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3). There is noautomatic downshift when you pushthe accelerator pedal to the floor.

When you move theshift lever to this position, thetransmission shifts to the lowestgear that can be selected withoutexceeding the engine redline. Atnormal speeds, it selects third gear.As the vehicle slows, it selectssecond gear at about 53 mph(85 km/h), and first gear at about 28mph (45 km/h). Accelerating in firstgear, the transmission upshifts tosecond gear at about 37 mph(59 km/h). You must move the shiftlever to D for the transmission toupshift to third gear.

In Sequential SportShift mode, eachtime you push forward on the shiftlever, the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Pull back on the lever todownshift. The number of the gearselected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftmode, move the shift lever further tothe driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’move the shift lever to the

passenger’s side.When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to the Sequential SportShiftmode, the display shows the selectedgear.

Withthe shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, youcan select the Sequential SportShiftmode to shift gears much like amanual transmission, but without aclutch pedal.

CONTINUED

Automatic Transmission

Low (L)

Sequential SportShift Mode

Driving

195

SELECTED GEAR Down shift

Up shift

Page 197: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

→→

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under theseconditions:

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission will also shiftautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It will downshift tofirst gear when the vehicle speed isunder 9 mph (15 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission will not downshift.

If the vehicle speed slows to belowthe redline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmission willdownshift and the display will showthe selected lower gear.

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting.

To shift from

4 3

5 4

To shift from

4 3

5 4To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

Speed range

over 0 mph(0 km/h)

over 9 mph(15 km/h)

over 18 mph(29 km/h)

over 37 mph(60 km/h)

Speed range

under 18 mph(29 km/h)

under 38 mph(60 km/h)

Speed range

under 41 mph(65 km/h)

under 47 mph(75 km/h)

Driving uphill

Driving on level roads and downhill

Automatic Transmission

196

Page 198: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To shift from

3 2

4 3

5 4

When you are in SequentialSportShift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, push forward on the shiftlever to shift to second gear. You willsee ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out insecond gear will help to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Set the parking brake.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

Speed range

under 63 mph(102 km/h)

under 97 mph(156 km/h)

under 149 mph(240 km/h)

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedureis also used to release the reverselockout.

To release the reverse lockout, makesure the ignition switch is in theACCESSORY(I) position.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Starting in Second Gear

Engine Speed Limiter

Shift Lock Release

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

197

Page 199: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover. Using asmall flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the edge of the cover to removeit.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot. Press the brakepedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

Insert a key into the shift lockrelease slot.

Push down on the key and movethe shift lever out of Park toneutral.

To release the reverse lockout,move the shift lever from neutralto reverse, then to Park.

3.

6.

5.

4.

Automatic Transmission

198

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOTCOVER

Page 200: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Lock the doors.

Parking Tips

ParkingD

riving

199

Page 201: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The anti-lockbrake system (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System

200

Page 202: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change.

it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

258

You should never pump the brake pedal.

ABS Indicator Important Safety Reminders

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle;

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

201

ABS INDICATOR

Page 203: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

In manual transmission models, ifthe VSA system is off and you

accelerate from a stop, the vehiclemay pull, and it may take extra effortto return the steering wheel tocenter.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.62

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

202

Page 204: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the VSA system onand off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on (see page ), or themulti-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message(see page ), the VSA systemautomatically turns on even if youturn it off with the VSA OFF button.

65

74 238

244

VSA Off Switch

VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) SystemD

riving

203

VSA OFF SWITCH

Page 205: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To see the inflation pressures of allfour tires, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown above.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator in the instrumentpanel to come on. If this happens,you will see which tire is losing thepressure in the multi-informationdisplay along with a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

You will see the above display on themulti-information display when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position and press the sideof the INFO button three times.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)D

riving

204

Page 206: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tire issignificantly under-inflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible,

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver’s doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,you will see the above message inthe multi-information display.

If you see this message, the systemis off and is not monitoring the tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.

It is possible that the pressuresshown in the multi-informationdisplay and the pressures youmanually measure are slightlydifferent.If the difference is significant andyou cannot make the low tirepressure indicator and message inthe multi-information display go outafter inflating the tires to thespecified values, have your dealercheck the system as soon as possible.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability. Each tire, includingthe spare should be checkedmonthly when cold, and set to therecommended inflation pressure asspecified in the vehicle placard andowner’s manual (see page ).235

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire PressureIndicator

TPMS System Failure

205

Page 207: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer; Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Towing a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

206

Page 208: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages in the multi-information display, a maintenancerecord, and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 208....................Maintenance Minder . 209....................Maintenance Record . 214

..............................Fluid Locations . 216......Engine Compartment Covers . 217

........................Adding Engine Oil . 218.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 219

..............................Engine Coolant . 221....................Windshield Washers . 222

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 223........Manual Transmission Fluid . 224

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 225....................Power Steering Fluid . 226

.............................................Lights . 227................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 231

.....................................Floor Mats . 232.................................Wiper Blades . 232

...............................................Tires . 234...................Checking the Battery . 240

.............................Vehicle Storage . 241

283

MaintenanceM

aintenance

207

Page 209: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

208

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Page 210: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life.

When the remaining engine oil life is15%, you will see the message‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ along withall maintenance items that areneeded at oil change time. Refer topage for a complete list of themaintenance main items and subitems.

The system also displays the codefor other scheduled maintenanceitems needing service.

One of the most convenient andimportant features of the multi-information display on your vehicleis the Maintenance Minder.

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the multi-informationdisplay as a percentage when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

213

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

209

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

Page 211: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

< >

< >

When the remaining oil life is lessthan 5%, you will see the message‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ with thesame maintenance items you sawwhen ‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ wasdisplayed. When you see thismessage, have the indicatedmaintenance performed as soon aspossible.

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the display as follows:

Press the or buttonrepeatedly until the oil life isdisplayed.

Press and hold the Select/Resetbutton for 10 seconds. The multi-information display will ask for aconfirmation.

If you are sure you want to resetthe display, press the Select/Reset button to select ‘‘OK.’’If you do not want to reset thedisplay, press the orbutton to select ‘‘Cancel.’’

1.

2.

3.

Maintenance Minder

210

Page 212: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you have the required serviceperformed but do not reset thedisplay, or reset the display withoutperforming the service, the systemwill not show the propermaintenance intervals. This can leadto serious mechanical problemsbecause you will no longer have anaccurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the remaining engineoil life gets less than 0%, you will seethe message ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’on the display. Immediately have theservice performed, and make sure toreset the display as previouslydescribed.

We recommend the use of Acuraparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Your authorized dealer knows yourvehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all receiptsas proof of completion, and have theperson who does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

211

Page 213: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

U.S. Vehicles:You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the multi-information display.

179

180

223

225

236

227

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

212

Page 214: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Maintenance Minder

213

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first columnon page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

Independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-informationdisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

NOTE:

1 :

212

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterRotate tiresInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and line (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive primarily in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds results in higher transmission temperatures.This requires transmission fluid changes morefrequently than recommended by the MaintenanceMinder. If you regulary drive your vehicle under theseconditions, have the transmission fluid changed at60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles(48,000 km).

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under-20°F,29°C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km(Canada)

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

Page 215: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Maintenance Record

214

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle.

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Page 216: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

215

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Page 217: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Fluid Locations

216

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(Manual Transmissiononly)

Page 218: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The component parts in the enginecompartment are protected byseveral covers. You may need toremove the covers when youperform some simple maintenancework.

Most of the covers can be removedsimply by pulling them straight up.

To remove the left or right cowlcover, push the tabs inward and pullthe cover straight up.

To remove the front bulkhead cover,first remove the four holding clipsusing a flat-tipped screwdriver.

When reinstalling the covers, makesure the pins and tabs are in theirproper positions.

Engine Compartment CoversM

aintenance

217

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

COWL COVERS BATTERY COVER

Page 219: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap, and tighten it securely. Waita few minutes, and recheck the oillevel (see page ). Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Honda motor oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda motor oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. makesure the API certification seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

179

Adding Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

218

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

Page 220: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the multi-information display.

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

2.

1.

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance

219

DRAIN BOLT WASHER

Page 221: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine and check your work.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

3.

7.

8.

9.

5.

6.

4.

Changing the Oil and Filter

220

OIL FILTER

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

Page 222: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to between theMIN and MAX lines. Inspect thecooling system for leaks.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant

Maintenance

221

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 223: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Add

coolant if it is low.Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

If the fluid levelis low, a message will be shown onthe multi-information display.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

On Canadian models:

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

Windshield Washers

222

RADIATOR CAP

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Page 224: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Within 60 to 90 seconds, removethe dipstick (yellow loop) from thetransmission, and wipe it with aclean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely.

Remove the dipstick, and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the filler holeto bring it to the upper mark.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the multi-informationdisplay.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.To thoroughly flush thetransmission, the technicianshould drain and refill it withHonda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Dothis three times. Then drain andrefill the transmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backin the transmission.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

Automatic Transmission FluidM

aintenance

223

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

DIPSTICK

Page 225: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove the checkbolt, and look for transmission fluidcoming out of the bolt hole. If a smallamount of fluid drips out of the bolthole, reinstall the check bolt.

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the multi-informationdisplay.

Manual Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission Fluid

224

CHECK BOLT

DRAIN BOLT

FILLER BOLT

Page 226: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly after removingthe engine compartment rear cover(see page ).

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,independent of mileage.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

217

Manual Transmission only

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake Fluid Clutch Fluid

Maintenance

225

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Page 227: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillimmediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold,and the engine compartment right-side cover is off (see page ). Thefluid should be between the UPPERLEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. If not,add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

217

Power Steering Fluid

226

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

Page 228: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be done by yourdealer or other qualified mechanic.

The headlight bulbs are a type ofhigh voltage discharge tube. Highvoltage can remain in the circuiteven with the light switch off and thekey removed. Because of this, youshould not attempt to examine orchange a headlight bulb yourself. If aheadlight bulb fails, take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it replaced.

Remove the left or right sideengine compartment cover fromthe side you are working on bycarefully pulling the cover out.

If you are replacing the bulb onthe driver’s side, remove the airintake cover by removing the twofastener pins and pulling the coverout. Then remove the upper partof the air intake duct by pulling itstraight up.

1.

CONTINUED

Replacing a Front Fog Light orDaytime Running Light Bulb

Headlight Aiming

Headlights

LightsM

aintenance

227

Page 229: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

(Driver’s side)Install the upper part of the airintake duct.

(Driver’s side)Install the engine compartmentcorner cover, and secure it withtwo fastener pins.

Install the engine compartmentside cover.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Start the engine. If you arereplacing a driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel all the way tothe right. If you are replacing apassenger’s side bulb, turn thesteering wheel to the left. Turn offthe engine.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

2.

3.

1.

Replacing the Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

Lights

228

Page 230: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from themiddle edge of the inner fendercover, and pull the inner fendercover back.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing it in and turning itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Push the inner fender cover inplace. Install the holding clip, andlock it in place by pushing on itscenter.

Open the trunk.Using a small screwdriver, pop upthe pin in the center of thefastener, then remove the fastener.Unscrew and remove the cargonet hook from the fender. Pullback the trunk lining.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Replacing the Rear Turn SignalBulb (in Fenders)

LightsM

aintenance

229

Page 231: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Insert the fastener into the hole onthe side of the trunk lining, andpush in the head of the fastener.Screw the cargo net hook into thefender.

Determine which back-up lightis out (left or right), then openthe trunk.

Pop up the pin in the center ofthe left or right corner fastenerwith a small screwdriver, andremove the fastener.

Remove the left sidefastener the same way.

Pull out the outside edge of therubber stop, then push the stopoutward, and pull it to remove it.

Remove thescrew from the trunk lid innerhandle, and remove the handletrim.

Pull back the corner of thetrunk lid lining.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7. b.

c.

d.

1 a.

e.

Left sideonly:

Right side only:

Replacing the Back-up Light Bulb(in Trunk Lid)

Lights

230

RIGHT STOP

CORNERFASTENER

CORNERFASTENER

LEFT STOP

TRUNK LIDINNERHANDLE

LEFT SIDE FASTENER

Page 232: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the trunk lid lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Insert the socket into the lightassembly. Turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Install all removed parts.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater, or isopropyl alcohol.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Lights, Cleaning the Seat BeltsM

aintenance

231

LOOP

Page 233: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

If you use non-Acura floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

The driver’s and right rearpassenger’s floor mats that camewith your vehicle hook over the floormat anchors. This keeps the floormats from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals(driver’s floor mat) or with the seatweight sensors (right rear floor mat).

1.

Floor Mats, Wiper Blades

Floor Mats Wiper Blades

232

FLOOR MAT ANCHORSDo not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

Page 234: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

2. 3. 5.

4.

6.

7.

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

233

LOCK TABBLADE REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

Page 235: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

However, these tires are not suitablefor driving on snow or ice, so all-season or winter tires must beinstalled for winter drivingconditions.

See page for winter drivingconditions.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

Your vehicle is equipped with highperformance all-season tires(marked All Season or M S on thesidewalls). These tires provideexcellent handling and brakingperformance in most drivingsituations.

Your vehicle is equipped with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a high-traction compoundand tread pattern to provide superioracceleration, cornering, and stoppingunder most driving conditions.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information about your tires,how and when to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

239

Manual Transmission Models withSummer Tires

All Models Except Manual TransmissionModels with Summer Tires

Inflation Guidelines

Tire Types

Tires

234

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 236: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeed.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

We strongly recommend that younot drive faster than posted speedlimits and conditions allow. If youdecide it is safe to drive at highspeeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h),be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot adjust the tire pressure,excessive heat can build up andcause sudden tire failure.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS.

Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

204

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for

High Speed Driving

Automatic Transmission Models

Manual Transmission ModelsAll Models

CONTINUED

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Recommended Tire Pressures forHigh Speed Driving

TiresM

aintenance

235

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P235/45R17 93W

35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P235/45R17 93W235/45R17 93W P235/45R17 93W

235/45R17 93W

39 psi (270 kPa ,2.7 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

33 psi (230 kPa ,2.3 kgf/cm )

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Page 237: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When you return to normal speeddriving, be sure to readjust the tirepressure for normal driving. Youshould wait until the tires are coldbefore adjusting the tire pressure.

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical information,see page .

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthe tires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours. If you have to drive thevehicle before checking tire pressure,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km). Add or release air, ifneeded, to match the recommendedcold tire pressure.

If you check air pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should use your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

273

Tire Inspection

Tires

236

Page 238: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your vehicle’s tires have wearindicators molded into the tread.When the tread wears down to thatpoint, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7mm) wide band running across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire. A tire that is this worn givesvery little traction on wet roads. Youshould replace the tire if you can seethe tread wear indicator in three ormore places around the tire.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires every 7,500 miles (12,000km). Move the tires to the positionsshown in the chart each time theyare rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

TiresM

aintenance

237

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

Front Front

(Front DirectionalTires and Wheels)

(Front Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

Page 239: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s side wall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theanti-lock brake and the vehiclestability assist systems to workinconsistently. Wheels:

Tires:

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels. If you do not, thetire pressure monitoring system willnot work on that tire.

Replacement wheels are available atyour Acura dealer.

(All season tire)

(Summer tire)

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Tires

238

17 x 8.0 JJ

P235/45R17 93W

235/45R17 93W

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Page 240: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withsummer tires, be aware that thesetires are not designed for winterdriving conditions. For moreinformation, consult your dealer.

273

274

Tires

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Summer Tires

Winter Driving

Maintenance

239

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Page 241: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your Acura dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

240

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Page 242: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Vehicle StorageM

aintenance

241

Page 243: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

242

Page 244: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 244....................Changing a Flat Tire . 245

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 250................................Jump Starting . 252

..............If the Engine Overheats . 254.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 256..........Charging System Indicator . 256

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 257...............Brake System Indicator . 258

..............................................Fuses . 259..............................Fuse Locations . 261

......................Emergency Towing . 263..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 264

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

243

Page 245: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

On models with manualtransmission, do not drive for along period with the compactspare tire mounted on a frontwheel; it will damage the limitedslip differential.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ). Driving with thecompact spare tire may activatethe VSA system.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

203

Compact Spare Tire

244

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

(The M/T compact spare is shown.)

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Page 246: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool case out of the sparetire.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

245

TOOL CASE JACK

TRUNK FLOORSPARE TIRE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Page 247: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

6. 7. 8.

Changing a Flat Tire

246

EXTENSIONWHEEL NUT WRENCH

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

Page 248: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Temporarilyplace the flat tire on the groundwith the outside surface of thewheel facing up. You could scratchthe wheel if you put it face down.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

9. 10. 11.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

247

BRAKE HUB

Page 249: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt. Attach the wingbolt to the bolt extension over thespacer cone.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

12. 13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

Changing a Flat Tire

248

WING BOLT SPACERCONE

BOLTEXTENSION

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Page 250: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Store the center cap in the trunk.

Lower the trunk floor, and closethe trunk lid.

Store the jack and tools in the toolcase. Place the tool case in thecenter of the flat tire.

18.

19.

20.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

249

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Page 251: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound or series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem (see

on page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in Park or neutral.

Check these things:263

240

251

252

If the Engine Won’t Start

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

250

Page 252: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the warning indicator maynot be working.

64

189

259

263

If the Engine Won’t Start

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

251

Page 253: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start a vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or like ice, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,lights, etc. Put the transmission inneutral or Park, and set theparking brake.

The numbers in the illustrationshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

1.

2.

3.

Jump Starting

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

252

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

Page 254: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromthe grounding strap on yourvehicle, then from the boosterbattery. Disconnect the positivecable from your vehicle, then fromthe booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

7.

6.

5.

4.

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

253

Page 255: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allthe accessories, and turn on thehazard indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

263

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

254

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

Page 256: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark(see onpage ).

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Start the engine, and set theinterior temperature to maximum.Add coolant to the radiator up tothe base of the filler neck. If youdo not have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

8.

9.

7.

11.

10.

6.

221

263

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowing

Adding Engine Coolant

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

255

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 257: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.

1.

2.

3.

4.

179

218

263

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

256

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

Page 258: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If your vehicle battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of normal driving to setthe codes again.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. Tighten the cap until itclicks at least once. Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it takes several days ofnormal driving.

277

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness CodeState

Emissions Testing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

257

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

Page 259: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

The brake system indicatornormally comes on whenyou turn the ignition switchto ON (II), and as areminder to check theparking brake. It will stayon if you do not fullyrelease the parking brake.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

225

263

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

258

Canada

U.S.

Page 260: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Remove the screws with aPhillips-head screwdriver.

The vehicle’s fuses are contained intwo fuse boxes. The interior fusebox is on the driver’s lower left side.To remove the fuse box lid, put yourfinger in the notch on the lid, pull ittoward you, and take it out of itshinges.

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side next to the air cleanerhousing.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuses control thatdevice. Check those fuses first, butcheck all the fuses before decidingthat a blown fuse is the cause.Replace any blown fuses, and checkif the device works.

1.

2.

3.

261 262

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

259

UNDER-HOODINTERIOR FUSE

BLOWN

Page 261: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

5.

6.

4.151

Fuses

260

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

Page 262: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

* *

No.

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedAmps.

6789

10

11121314151617181920212223

12345

15 A30 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A

Left Headlight Low BeamRear Defroster CoilLeft Headlight High BeamSmall LightRight Headlight High Beam

Right Headlight Low BeamBack UpIGPCondenser FanFront Fog LightDaytime Running LightRadiator Fan MotorMG Clutch RelayHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack UP, ACCHazard WarningVSA Pump Motor RelayVSA Fail Safe RelayFI ECU (ECM/PCM)Power SeatHeater MotorBatteryIGI Main

15 A7.5 A15 A30 A20 A15 A30 A7.5 A20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A40 A40 A40 A40 A

120 A50 A

U.S. models Canadian models1 : 2 :

1

2

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

261

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Page 263: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

No. Amps.

No.

Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedAmps.

123456789

15 A15 A

15 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A15 A

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

DBWIG1 CoilNot UsedLAFRadioInterior LightsBack UpDoor LockAccessory Socket

IG1 OPDSIG1 WiperTPMS

Driver’s Power Seat (Slide)Seat HeaterDriver’s Power Seat (Recline)Passenger’s Power Seat (Slide)IG1 ACGIG1 Fuel PumpWasherMeterSRSIGPRear Left Power WindowRear Right Power WindowFront Right Power WindowFront Left Power WindowMoonroofVBSOLHACOP2ACCHAC OP

7.5 A30 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A15 A15 A15 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A30 A30 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

Passenger’s Power Seat (Recline)

Fuse Locations

262

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Page 264: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclebehind another vehicle with just arope or chain. It is very dangerous.There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed above, and leave theignition switched in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock. Makesure the radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power socket areturned off so they do not run downthe battery.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way to trans-port your vehicle.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

263

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

Page 265: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchor in the front bumper.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see page ).

To use the towing hook:Remove the cover from the

bumper by pushing the lower partof the cover with your finger.

Remove the towing hook, hookextension, and wheel nut wrenchfrom the tool case in the spare tire.

Using the wheel nut wrench,fasten the extension into the bolthole.

3.

1.

2.263

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

264

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Page 266: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Screw the towing hook into thehook extension, and tighten itsecurely by hand.

4.

If Your Vehicle Gets StuckTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

265

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

Page 267: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

266

Page 268: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 268................................Specifications . 270

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 272

.................................Treadwear . 272......................................Traction . 272

.............................Temperature . 273.................................Tire Labeling . 273

.......................Emissions Controls . 274.....................The Clean Air Act . 274

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 274

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 274

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 274

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 275....................PGM-FI System . 275

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 275

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 275

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 275

....................Replacement Parts . 275..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 276

..............State Emissions Testing . 277

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

267

Page 269: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

268

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Page 270: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

269

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSIONNUMBER

Page 271: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

- -

Specifications

270

Dimensions

Weights

Capacities

Capacities

Air Conditioning

186.2 in (4,730 mm)72.2 in (1,835 mm)56.7 in (1,441 mm)107.9 in (2,740 mm)62.1 in (1,577 mm)62.0 in (1,576 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

ND-OIL8

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

7.6 US qt (7.2 )3.1 US qt (2.9 )5.3 US qt (5.0 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

2.3 US qt (2.2 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

2.14 US gal (8.1 )2.09 US gal (7.9 )

1.66 US gal (6.3 )1.69 US gal (6.4 )

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidManualtransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehicleCanada Vehicle

1

2

17.1 US gal (64.7 )

Page 272: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

--

****

-----------

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

271

Engine

Alignment

Tires

Lights

Battery

Fuses

3.50 x 3.39 in (89.0 x 86.0 mm)195.9 cu-in (3,210 cm )

11.0 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

0°30’1°00’

3°17’

P235/45R17 93W235/45R17 93W

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

T145/70R17 106MT135/80R16 101M

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

12 V 21 W12 V 60 W (HB3)

12 V 35 W (HID)Headlight(High beam/Low beam)DRL (Canadian models)Front/Rear turn signal lightsFront Fog lights (U.S.models)Front parking lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsMap lights

12 V12 V

51 W (HB4)5 W21 CP3 CP5 W5 W2 CP5 W4 CP

Capacity 12 V 65 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-hood

See page 262 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 261 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

NGK:DENSO:

Front/Rear

Spare

Front

RearSpare

All season tireSummer tireVehicles with manual transmissionVehicles with automatic transmission

1 :2 :3 :4 :

Automatic:Manual:

1

2

3

4

Page 273: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

-The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

272

Page 274: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

--

--

--

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,

either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire width in millimeters.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109 and No. 139.Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN.

Date of manufacture.Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

P

R

DOT

2202

23545

1793

W

OBGN

PVC

Temperature A, B, C

Tire Labeling

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication NumberTire Size

TechnicalInform

ation

273

DOT OBGN PVC 2202

P235/45R17 93W

Page 275: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are then

drawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Max Press The maximum airpressure the tire can hold.

Max Load The maximum load thetire can carry at maximum airpressure.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Labeling, Emissions Controls

274

Page 276: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Ignition Timing Control System

TechnicalInform

ation

275

Page 277: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

The three way catalytic convertercontains platinum, palladium, andrhodium. These metals serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

276

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERWARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTICCONVERTERS

Page 278: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

TechnicalInform

ation

277

Page 279: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 6th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

State Emissions Testing

278

Page 280: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

....Customer Service Information . 280....................Warranty Coverages . 281

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 282

.....................Authorized Manuals . 283

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

279

Page 281: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Your dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraClient Services Office.

Bella International Corp.C-1 Bechara St. Segarra CornerPuerto Nuevo, PR 00920

Tel:(787) 250-4327

Vehicle identification number (seepage )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, andtelephone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

268

Customer Service Information

280

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

Page 282: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Your new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2006 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2006 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

281

Page 283: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer,or Acura Automobile Division,American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Acura AutomobileDivision, American Honda Motor Co.,Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

282

Page 284: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

*2006

ACU

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

283

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61SEP02

61SEP02EL

61SEP30

31SEP620

31SEP720

31SEP910

31SEPQ20

ACU-R

Form Description

2004-2006 Acura TL Service Manual

2004-2006 Acura TL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2004-2006 Acura TL

Body Repair Manual

2006 Acura TL Owner’s Manual

2006 Acura TL Navigation Manual

2006 Acura TL

Maintenance Journal

2006 Acura TL Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$75.00

$50.00

$44.00

$37.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

www. helminc. com

Page 285: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

SHIP

TO

PAYMENT

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

284

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 286: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

...Accessories and Modifications . 181................................Accessories . 181

............................Modifications . 182ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 90............Accessory Power Sockets . 115

................Adding Engine Coolant . 221........................Adding Engine Oil . 218

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 219.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 23

...............Additional Information . 23......................................Servicing . 32

...................System Components . 23..............Air Conditioning System . 122

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 234......................................Antifreeze . 221

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 61, 201

...................................Operation . 201..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 151

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 90................................Audio System . 127

...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 86

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 21

.............Automatic Speed Control . 153..............Automatic Transmission . 193

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 270...............Checking Fluid Level . 223

.......................................Shifting . 193.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 193

.......................................Shifting . 193....................Shift Lock Release . 197

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 60, 256............................Jump Starting . 252

..............................Maintenance . 240............................Specifications . 271

..............................Before Driving . 175..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 20

...........................Beverage Holder . 115Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 201.............Break-in, New Linings . 176

...........................................Fluid . 225.......................................Parking . 112

.................System Indicator . 60, 258

........................Wear Indicators . 200.............................Braking System . 200

.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 176..Brightness Control, Instruments . 85

........................Brights, Headlights . 84Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 230.................................Fog Lights . 227

............................Specifications . 271............Turn Signal Lights . 228, 229

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 227

............................Capacities Chart . 270.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 53

............................Carrying, Cargo . 183Cassette Player

............................................Care . 149...................................Operation . 147

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii..................................Ceiling Light . 113

........................Certification Label . 268...................................Chains, tires . 239

Index

A

B

C

IND

EX

I

Page 287: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

**

**

Changing Oil........................................How to . 219......................................When to . 209

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 245...Charging System Indicator . 60, 256

............Checklist, Before Driving . 188..................Childproof Door Locks . 94

.....................................Child Safety . 34..............................Booster Seats . 50

...................................Child Seats . 42..........................................Infants . 39

............................Large Children . 49.........................................LATCH . 44

......................Risks with Airbags . 35.............................Small Children . 40

.........................................Tethers . 47.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 35

Cleaning.................................Floor Mats . 232

...................................Seat Belts . 231...............Climate Control System . 125

..............................................Clock . 112..........................CO in the Exhaust . 53.......................Compact Spare tire . 244

.................Console Compartment . 116...............Consumer Information . 279

.............Controls, Instruments and . 57Coolant

........................................Adding . 221....................................Checking . 180

.........................Proper Solution . 221...................Temperature Gauge . 66

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 274

................Cruise Control Indicator . 62............Cruise Control Operation . 153

...................................Cup Holders . 115..........Customer Relations Office . 280

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 58

............Daytime Running Lights . 84Daytime Running Light

...................................Indicator . 63............Defects, Reporting Safety . 282

................Defogger, Rear Window . 87

..............Defrosting the Windows . 124....................................Dimensions . 270

...............Dimming the Headlights . 84

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 223

..................................Engine Oil . 179..........................Directional Signals . 84

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 200.................................Disc Changer . 140

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 146.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 220

Doors..............................Monitor Light . 69

......................Power Door Locks . 92..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 272

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7...........................................Driving . 187

....................................Economy . 180Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 103

..............................Economy, Fuel . 186............Emergencies on the Road . 243.............Battery, Jump Starting . 252...........Brake System Indicator . 258

................Changing a Flat Tire . 245.....Charging System Indicator . 256

Index

D

E

II

Page 288: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

* CONTINUED

..................Checking the Fuses . 259.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 86......If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 264

............................Jump Starting . 252.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 256...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 257

..................Overheated Engine . 254.......................................Towing . 263

.........................Emergency Brake . 112......................Emergency Flashers . 86

......................Emergency Towing . 263............Emergency Trunk Opener . 94

.......................Emissions Controls . 274.............Emissions Testing, State . 277

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 66

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 60, 257.........................................Oil Life . 73

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 256

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 218...............................Overheating . 254

............................Specifications . 271

....................Speed Limiter . 191, 197.......................................Starting . 189

.................Engine, if it won’t start . 250

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 177.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 274

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 53Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 180.........................................Gasoline . 176

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 64...........................................Gauge . 66

................Octane Requirement . 176........................Tank, Filling the . 177

................Gas Station Procedures . 177

...................................Fan, Interior . 122Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 119....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 177

........................................Filter, Oil . 219.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 86

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 245.....................................Floor Mats . 232

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 223

..........................................Brake . 225.........................................Clutch . 225

..............Manual Transmission . 224..........................Power Steering . 226

................Windshield Washers . 222FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 132

.....................................Fog Lights . 85

..........................Four-way Flashers . 86............................Front Airbags . 11, 23

......................................Front Seats . 98

......................................Adjusting . 98.......................................Heaters . 106...................................Airbags . 11, 23

.................................................Fuel . 176......................Fill Door and Cap . 177

...........................................Gauge . 66................Octane Requirement . 176

........................Reserve Indicator . 64........................Tank, Filling the . 177

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 259

Index

F

G

IND

EX

III

Page 289: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

** **

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 66

...............................................Fuel . 66...............................Speedometer . 66

.................................Tachometer . 66Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 1936-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 190......................................Glove Box . 116

.......................Halogen Fog Bulbs . 227..........HandsFree Link (HFL) . 80, 160

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 86........................................Headlights . 84

........................................Aiming . 227Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 86.......Daytime Running Lights . 84

..................High Beam Indicator . 63.........................Reminder Chime . 84

...................................Turning on . 84..............................Head Restraints . 99

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 84

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 156

.......................Hood, Opening the . 178

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 268Ignition

..............................................Keys . 89...........................................Switch . 90

............Timing Control System . 275........................Immobilizer System . 91

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.........................................Indicators . 60

......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 61, 201Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 60, 258................Charging System . 60, 256

.............................Cruise Control . 62DRL (Daytime Running

..................................Lights) . 63...................................Fog Light . 64...................................High Beam . 63

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 64......................................Low Fuel . 64

................Low Oil Pressure . 60, 256

...........................Side Airbag Off . 61.........................................SRS . 30, 61

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 63

............................VSA Activation . 62.................................VSA System . 62...............................Infant Restraint . 39

......................................Infant Seats . 39..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 235.................................Inside Mirror . 101

.............................Inspection, Tire . 236............................Instrument Panel . 59

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 60........Instrument Panel Brightness . 85

...............................Interior Lights . 113........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 246.......................................Jack, Tire . 245

................................Jump Starting . 252

Index

H

I

J

IV

Page 290: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 89...............Keyless Memory Setting . 76

.......................Label, Certification . 268.................Lane Change, Signaling . 84

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 20Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 227.......................................Indicator . 60

.........................................Parking . 84..................................Turn Signal . 84

.....................................Load Limit . 184......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 90

........................Lockout Prevention . 92Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 90..................................Glove Box . 116

.................................Power Door . 92...........................................Trunk . 93

........................Low Coolant Level . 180...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 60, 256

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 270

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 183

..................................Maintenance . 207.....................................Messages . 73

........................................Minder . 209...Owner Maintenance Checks . 212

........................................Record . 214..........................................Safety . 208

Malfunction Indicator....................................Lamp . 60, 257

...................Manual Transmission . 190........Manual Transmission Fluid . 224

...........Memory, Driving Position . 103...............................Meters, Gauges . 66

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 101...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 182

.......................................Moonroof . 110.............Multi-Information Display . 67

............................Engine Oil Life . 73...........................HandsFreeLink . 80

.........Keyless Memory Settings . 76.............Maintenance Messages . 73

.....................................Odometer . 71.................Outside Temperature . 72

............................Trip Computer . 75...................................Trip Meter . 71

...................Neutral Gear Position . 194..................New Vehicle Break-in . 176

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 268

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 176.........................................Odometer . 71

...............................Odometer, Trip . 71Oil

........................Change, How to . 219......................Change, When to . 209......................Checking Engine . 179..............Pressure Indicator . 60, 256

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 218

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 90

Index

K

L

N

O

M

IND

EX

V

Page 291: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 274

............................Outside Mirrors . 101.....................Outside Temperature . 72

....................Overheating, Engine . 254....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 212

..............Panel Brightness Control . 85........................Park Gear Position . 194

...........................................Parking . 199...............................Parking Brake . 112

Parking Brake and Brake System...............................Indicator . 60, 258

.................................Parking Lights . 84..Parking Over Things that Burn . 199....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 31

.............................PGM-FI System . 275...............Power Socket Locations . 115

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18........................Protecting Children . 34

Installing a Child Seat Using........................................Latch . 44

Installing a Child Seat with a..................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 46

Installing a Child Seat with a......................................Tether . 47

.................Selecting a Child Seat . 42.......................Protecting Infants . 39

.......Protecting Larger Children . 49.........Protecting Small Children . 40

..................Protecting Your Discs . 145

...................Radiator Overheating . 254Radio/Cassette/Disc Sound

........................................System . 127...................Readiness Codes . 257, 277

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 229..........................Rear Seat Armrest . 99

..........................Rear View Mirror . 101.................Rear Window Defogger . 87...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 98

.............................Reminder Lights . 60................Remote Audio Controls . 150

.......................Remote Transmitter . 95

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 219

..........................................Fuses . 259................................Light Bulbs . 227

...........................................Tires . 238.............................Wiper Blades . 232

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 22

...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 180.........................Restraint, Child . 39, 40

..................Reverse Gear Position . 194................................Rotation, Tire . 237

................................Safety Belts . 10, 20.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 282

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

..................................Door Locks . 13..........................Head Restraints . 15

.....................................Seat Belts . 10..................Seats and Seat-Backs . 14

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 54...............................Safety Messages . ii

................................Satellite Radio . 134

Index

P

RS

VI

Page 292: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

CONTINUED

...................................Seat Belts . 10, 20...............Additional Information . 20

.....................................Cleaning . 231......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 20

................................Maintenance . 22Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 20, 60...................System Components . 20

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18..................................Seat Heaters . 106

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 98............................Security System . 152

........Sequential SportShift Mode . 195...............................Serial Number . 268

...........................Service Intervals . 209

...........................Service Manual . 283.........Service Station Procedures . 177

..........................Setting the Clock . 112.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 193

........................Shift Lock Release . 197...........................................Shifting . 193

..............................Side Airbags . 11, 28........Side Airbag Off Indicator . 31, 61

......................Side Curtain Airbags . 30...............................Signaling Turns . 84

.....................................Snow Tires . 239

................................Sound System . 127Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 244............................Specifications . 271

....................Specifications Charts . 270................................Speed Control . 153

..........SRS, Additional Information . 38...Additional Safety Precautions . 33

....................Airbag Components . 23.............................Airbag Service . 32

How the SRS Indicator.......................................Works . 30

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 25

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 30.............................SRS Indicator . 30, 61

....START (Ignition Key Position) . 90.......................Starting the Engine . 189

................With a Dead Battery . 252..............State Emissions Testing . 277

........Steam Coming from Engine . 254Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 88.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 90

...................Stereo Sound System . 127....................Storing Your Vehicle . 241

........................Sunglasses Holder . 117....Supplemental Restraint System . 23

......................................Servicing . 32...............................SRS Indicator . 30

...................System Components . 23

.....................................Tachometer . 66.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 243

....................................Tape Player . 147Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 272.....Emissions Control Systems . 274

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 276

.......................Temperature Gauge . 66....................Temperature, Outside . 72

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 126..............Tether Anchorage Points . 47

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 276..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 88

Index

T

IND

EX

VII

Page 293: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

..........................Time, Setting the . 112....................................Tire Chains . 239

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 245Tire Pressure Monitoring

....................................System . 204Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 65, 205.....TPMS System Indicator . 65, 205

..............TPMS System Failure . 205Tire Pressure Monitoring System

.....................................Messages . 74...............................................Tires . 234

..............................Air Pressure . 235.........................Checking Wear . 236..........................Compact Spare . 244

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 272......................................Inflation . 235

..................................Inspection . 236...................................Replacing . 238

......................................Rotating . 237...........................................Snow . 239

............................Specifications . 271.............................Summer Tire . 239

.......................Traction Devices . 239..........................Winter Driving . 239

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 245

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 206

................Emergency Wrecker . 263...........................Traction Devices . 239

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

..............................Automatic . 223.Checking Fluid Level Manual . 224

..................Fluid Selection . 223, 224..............Identification Number . 268.............Shifting the Automatic . 193

..................Shifting the Manual . 190.....................................Treadwear . 237

................................Trip Computer . 75.......................................Trip Meter . 71

................................................Trunk . 93........Emergency Trunk Release . 94

.................................Opening the . 93...................Open Monitor Light . 69

....................................Turn Signals . 84

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 243

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 272

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 176.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 220

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 184......................Vehicle Dimensions . 270

....Vehicle Identification Number . 268Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 202........VSA System Indicator . 62, 202

...VSA Activation Indicator . 62, 202.........................VSA Off Switch . 203

.............................Vehicle Storage . 241.................................................VIN . 268

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 218

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 54

..................Warranty Coverages . 281Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 222.......................................Indicator . 71.....................................Operation . 83

Index

U

V

W

VIII

Page 294: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

**Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 88............Alignment and Balance . 237

..........................Compact Spare . 244Windows

................Operating the Power . 107...........................Rear, Defogger . 87

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 83...................................Defroster . 124

.....................................Washers . 222Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 232.....................................Operation . 83

....................................Worn Tires . 236.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 263

......................XM Satellite Radio . 134

:: Canada only

U.S.

Index

X

IND

EX

IX

Page 295: 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0606OM/enu/TL0606OM.… · 2006 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Manual Transmission Fluid:

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

API Service SJ ‘‘EnergyConserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-20viscosity (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Manual Transmission ModelsFront:35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )Rear:

Automatic Transmission ModelsFront:

Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).Capacity:2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm )

218

223

224

226

225

17.1 US gal (64.7 )